Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
ERGA04DAV3(A)
ERGA06DAV3(A)
ERGA08DAV3(A)
EHVH04S23DAV(G)
EHVH08S23DAV(G)
Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
Final English - Tanslations in progress
English
Table of contents
6.2.2
Table of contents
6.3
1 General safety precautions
1.1
1.2
About the documentation ..........................................................
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols..............................
For the installer..........................................................................
1.2.1
General .......................................................................
1.2.2
Installation site ............................................................
1.2.3
Refrigerant ..................................................................
1.2.4
Brine............................................................................
1.2.5
Water ..........................................................................
1.2.6
Electrical .....................................................................
2 About the documentation
2.1
2.2
About this document..................................................................
Installer reference guide at a glance .........................................
3 About the box
3.1
3.2
3.3
4.3
Overview: About the box ...........................................................
Outdoor unit...............................................................................
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit .........................................
3.2.2
To handle the outdoor unit ..........................................
3.2.3
To remove the accessories from the outdoor unit.......
Indoor unit .................................................................................
3.3.1
To unpack the indoor unit ...........................................
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the indoor unit.........
3.3.3
To handle the indoor unit ............................................
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
Overview: Application guidelines...............................................
Setting up the space heating system ........................................
5.2.1
Single room.................................................................
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone ................................
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones...............................
Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating...............
Setting up the domestic hot water tank .....................................
5.4.1
System layout – Integrated DHW tank........................
5.4.2
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for
the DHW tank..............................................................
5.4.3
Setup and configuration – DHW tank..........................
5.4.4
DHW pump for instant hot water.................................
5.4.5
DHW pump for disinfection .........................................
Setting up the energy metering .................................................
5.5.1
Produced heat.............................................................
5.5.2
Consumed energy.......................................................
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply...................................
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply ............................
Setting up the power consumption control ................................
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation ........................................
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital inputs .................
5.6.3
Power limitation process .............................................
Setting up an external temperature sensor ...............................
6 Preparation
6.1
6.2
2
6.5
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
7 Installation
7.1
7.2
7.3
9
7.4
7.5
10
10
10
11
12
14
15
16
16
7.6
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
21
Overview: Preparation............................................................... 21
Preparing the installation site .................................................... 21
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit ........ 21
Installer reference guide
6.4
6
Overview: About the units and options......................................
9
Identification ..............................................................................
9
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit ................................. 9
4.2.2
Identification label: Indoor unit .................................... 9
Combining units and options .....................................................
9
4.3.1
Possible options for the outdoor unit........................... 9
4.3.2
Possible options for the indoor unit............................. 9
4.3.3
Possible combinations of indoor unit and outdoor
unit .............................................................................. 10
5 Application guidelines
5.1
5.2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
7
4 About the units and options
4.1
4.2
3
Additional installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit in cold climates ........................................
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the indoor unit ...........
Preparing refrigerant piping........................................................
6.3.1
Refrigerant piping requirements...................................
6.3.2
Refrigerant piping insulation ........................................
Preparing water piping ...............................................................
6.4.1
Water circuit requirements ...........................................
6.4.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel prepressure .......................................................................
6.4.3
To check the water volume and flow rate ....................
6.4.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel....
6.4.5
To check the water volume: Examples ........................
Preparing electrical wiring ..........................................................
6.5.1
About preparing electrical wiring..................................
6.5.2
About preferential kWh rate power supply ...................
6.5.3
Overview of electrical connections except external
actuators ......................................................................
6.5.4
Overview of electrical connections for external and
internal actuators .........................................................
7.7
7.8
22
22
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
27
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
Overview: Installation .................................................................
Opening the units .......................................................................
7.2.1
About opening the units ...............................................
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit..............................................
7.2.3
To open the indoor unit ................................................
7.2.4
To open the switch box cover of the indoor unit ..........
7.2.5
To lower the switch box on the indoor unit...................
Mounting the outdoor unit...........................................................
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit..................................
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit...............
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure .............................
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit.............................................
7.3.5
To provide drainage .....................................................
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling over ...............
Mounting the indoor unit.............................................................
7.4.1
About mounting the indoor unit ....................................
7.4.2
Precautions when mounting the indoor unit.................
7.4.3
To install the indoor unit...............................................
Connecting the refrigerant piping ...............................................
7.5.1
About connecting the refrigerant piping .......................
7.5.2
Precautions when connecting the refrigerant piping ....
7.5.3
Guidelines when connecting the refrigerant piping ......
7.5.4
Pipe bending guidelines...............................................
7.5.5
To flare the pipe end ....................................................
7.5.6
To braze the pipe end ..................................................
7.5.7
Using the stop valve and service port ..........................
7.5.8
To connect the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit ...
7.5.9
To connect the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit .....
Checking the refrigerant piping ..................................................
7.6.1
About checking the refrigerant piping ..........................
7.6.2
Precautions when checking the refrigerant piping .......
7.6.3
To check for leaks........................................................
7.6.4
To perform vacuum drying ...........................................
Charging refrigerant ...................................................................
7.7.1
About charging refrigerant ...........................................
7.7.2
Precautions when charging refrigerant ........................
7.7.3
To determine the additional refrigerant amount ...........
7.7.4
To determine the complete recharge amount ..............
7.7.5
To charge additional refrigerant ...................................
7.7.6
To fix the fluorinated greenhouse gases label .............
Connecting the water piping.......................................................
7.8.1
About connecting the water piping...............................
7.8.2
Precautions when connecting the water piping............
7.8.3
To connect the water piping.........................................
7.8.4
To connect the recirculation piping ..............................
7.8.5
To connect the drain hose to the drain ........................
7.8.6
To fill the water circuit ..................................................
7.8.7
To fill the domestic hot water tank ...............................
Final English - Tanslations in progress
29
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
31
32
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
36
36
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
41
41
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
1 General safety precautions
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.8.8
To insulate the water piping ........................................
Connecting the electrical wiring.................................................
7.9.1
About connecting the electrical wiring.........................
7.9.2
About electrical compliance ........................................
7.9.3
Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring .....
7.9.4
Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring .......
7.9.5
Specifications of standard wiring components............
7.9.6
To connect the electrical wiring on the outdoor unit....
7.9.7
To connect the electrical wiring on the indoor unit......
7.9.8
To connect the main power supply .............................
7.9.9
To connect the backup heater power supply ..............
7.9.10 To connect the shut-off valve......................................
7.9.11 To connect the electrical meters .................................
7.9.12 To connect the domestic hot water pump ...................
7.9.13 To connect the alarm output .......................................
7.9.14 To connect the space heating ON/OFF output ...........
7.9.15 To connect the changeover to external heat source...
7.9.16 To connect the power consumption digital inputs .......
7.9.17 To connect the safety thermostat (normal closed
contact) .......................................................................
7.9.18 To connect the anti-legionella heater power supply....
Finishing the outdoor unit installation ........................................
7.10.1 To finish the outdoor unit installation ..........................
Finishing the indoor unit installation ..........................................
7.11.1 To close the indoor unit...............................................
8 Configuration
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
48
48
49
49
49
49
50
51
51
51
51
51
53
53
53
54
57
58
61
63
65
65
74
75
76
Overview: Commissioning.........................................................
Precautions when commissioning .............................................
Checklist before commissioning................................................
Checklist during commissioning ................................................
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate .................................
9.4.2
Air purge function........................................................
9.4.3
To perform an operation test run ................................
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run ..................................
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout................................
11.5
76
76
76
76
76
77
77
78
78
About cleaning the water filter in case of trouble........................
11.5.1 To remove the water filter ............................................
11.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble ...................
11.5.3 To install the water filter ...............................................
12 Troubleshooting
12.1
12.2
12.3
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
Overview: Configuration ............................................................
8.1.1
To access the most used commands .........................
Configuration wizard..................................................................
Possible screens .......................................................................
8.3.1
Possible screens: Overview........................................
8.3.2
Home screen...............................................................
8.3.3
Main menu screen ......................................................
8.3.4
Menu screen ...............................................................
8.3.5
Setpoint screen ...........................................................
8.3.6
Detailed screen with values ........................................
8.3.7
Detailed screen with weather-dependent curve..........
8.3.8
Schedule screen: Example .........................................
Settings menu ...........................................................................
8.4.1
Malfunction..................................................................
8.4.2
Room ..........................................................................
8.4.3
Main zone ...................................................................
8.4.4
Additional zone ...........................................................
8.4.5
Space heating .............................................................
8.4.6
Tank ............................................................................
8.4.7
User settings ...............................................................
8.4.8
Information ..................................................................
8.4.9
Installer settings ..........................................................
Menu structure: Overview user settings ....................................
Menu structure: Overview installer settings...............................
9 Commissioning
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
41
41
41
41
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
45
45
46
46
46
46
46
12.4
83
Overview: Troubleshooting.........................................................
Precautions when troubleshooting .............................................
Solving problems based on symptoms.......................................
12.3.1 Symptom: The unit is NOT heating as expected .........
12.3.2 Symptom: The compressor does NOT start (space
heating or domestic water heating)..............................
12.3.3 Symptom: The pump is making noise (cavitation) .......
12.3.4 Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens..................
12.3.5 Symptom: The water pressure relief valve leaks .........
12.3.6 Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently heated at
low outdoor temperatures ............................................
12.3.7 Symptom: The pressure at the tapping point is
temporarily unusually high ...........................................
12.3.8 Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed away due
to a swollen tank ..........................................................
12.3.9 Symptom: Tank disinfection function is NOT
completed correctly (AH-error).....................................
Solving problems based on error codes.....................................
12.4.1 To display the help text in case of a malfunction .........
12.4.2 Error codes: Overview .................................................
13 Disposal
13.1
13.2
13.3
14.6
14.7
14.8
83
83
83
83
83
84
84
84
84
85
85
85
85
85
85
87
Overview: Disposal..................................................................... 87
To pump down............................................................................ 87
To start and stop forced cooling ................................................. 88
14 Technical data
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
81
81
82
82
89
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit......................................................
Piping diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit .....................................................
Wiring diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................
Table 1 – Maximum refrigerant charge allowed in a room:
indoor unit...................................................................................
Table 2 – Minimum floor area: indoor unit..................................
Table 3 – Minimum venting opening area for natural
ventilation: indoor unit ................................................................
ESP curve: Indoor unit ...............................................................
89
90
91
92
95
95
95
96
15 Glossary
96
16 Field settings table
97
1
General safety precautions
1.1
About the documentation
▪ The original documentation is written in English. All other
languages are translations.
▪ The precautions described in this document cover very important
topics, follow them carefully.
▪ The installation of the system, and all activities described in the
installation manual and the installer reference guide MUST be
performed by an authorised installer.
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols
10 Hand-over to the user
79
DANGER
11 Maintenance and service
79
Indicates a situation that results in death or serious injury.
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Overview: Maintenance and service .........................................
Maintenance safety precautions................................................
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit ................
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the indoor unit...................
11.4.1 To drain the domestic hot water tank..........................
79
79
79
80
81
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in electrocution.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
3
1 General safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
Indicates a situation that could result in burning because of
extreme hot or cold temperatures.
▪ Do NOT touch the refrigerant piping, water piping or
internal parts during and immediately after operation. It
could be too hot or too cold. Give it time to return to
normal temperature. If you must touch it, wear
protective gloves.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Indicates a situation that could result in explosion.
▪ Do NOT touch any accidental leaking refrigerant.
WARNING
WARNING
Indicates a situation that could result in death or serious
injury.
Provide adequate measures to prevent that the unit can be
used as a shelter by small animals. Small animals that
make contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions,
smoke or fire.
WARNING: FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
CAUTION
CAUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium fins of the unit.
NOTICE
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT place any objects or equipment on top of the
unit.
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or
property damage.
▪ Do NOT sit, climb or stand on the unit.
INFORMATION
NOTICE
Indicates useful tips or additional information.
Symbol
Works executed on the outdoor unit are best done under
dry weather conditions to avoid water ingress.
Explanation
Before installation, read the installation and
operation manual, and the wiring instruction sheet.
Before performing maintenance and service tasks,
read the service manual.
For more information, see the installer and user
reference guide.
In accordance with the applicable legislation, it might be necessary
to provide a logbook with the product containing at least: information
on maintenance, repair work, results of tests, stand-by periods,…
Also, at least, following information MUST be provided at an
accessible place at the product:
▪ Instructions for shutting down the system in case of an emergency
▪ Name and address of fire department, police and hospital
1.2
For the installer
▪ Name, address and day and night telephone numbers for
obtaining service
1.2.1
General
In Europe, EN378 provides the necessary guidance for this logbook.
If you are NOT sure how to install or operate the unit, contact your
dealer.
1.2.2
Installation site
▪ Provide sufficient space around the unit for servicing and air
circulation.
NOTICE
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or
accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit,
leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Only use
accessories, optional equipment and spare parts made or
approved by Daikin.
▪ Make sure the installation site withstands the unit's weight and
vibration.
▪ Make sure the area is well ventilated. Do NOT block any
ventilation openings.
▪ Make sure the unit is level.
WARNING
Make sure installation, testing and applied materials
comply with applicable legislation (on top of the
instructions described in the Daikin documentation).
CAUTION
Wear adequate personal protective equipment (protective
gloves, safety glasses,…) when installing, maintaining or
servicing the system.
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ In potentially explosive atmospheres.
▪ In places where there is machinery that emits electromagnetic
waves. Electromagnetic waves may disturb the control system,
and cause malfunction of the equipment.
WARNING
▪ In places where there is a risk of fire due to the leakage of
flammable gases (example: thinner or gasoline), carbon fibre,
ignitable dust.
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that
nobody, especially children, can play with them. Possible
risk: suffocation.
▪ In places where corrosive gas (example: sulphurous acid gas) is
produced. Corrosion of copper pipes or soldered parts may cause
the refrigerant to leak.
1.2.3
Refrigerant
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
Installer reference guide
4
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
1 General safety precautions
NOTICE
If
Make sure refrigerant piping installation complies with
applicable legislation. In Europe, EN378 is the applicable
standard.
A siphon tube is present
Then
Charge with the cylinder upright.
(i.e., the cylinder is marked with
"Liquid filling siphon attached")
NOTICE
Make sure the field piping and connections are NOT
subjected to stress.
A siphon tube is NOT present
WARNING
Charge with the cylinder upside
down.
During tests, NEVER pressurize the product with a
pressure higher than the maximum allowable pressure (as
indicated on the nameplate of the unit).
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of refrigerant leakage. If
refrigerant gas leaks, ventilate the area immediately.
Possible risks:
▪ Open refrigerant cylinders slowly.
▪ Charge the refrigerant in liquid form. Adding it in gas form may
prevent normal operation.
▪ Excessive refrigerant concentrations in a closed room
can lead to oxygen deficiency.
CAUTION
When the refrigerant charging procedure is done or when
pausing, close the valve of the refrigerant tank
immediately. If the valve is NOT closed immediately,
remaining pressure might charge additional refrigerant.
Possible consequence: Incorrect refrigerant amount.
▪ Toxic gas may be produced if refrigerant gas comes
into contact with fire.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
1.2.4
Brine
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
WARNING
The selection of the brine MUST be in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of brine leakage. If
brine leaks, ventilate the area immediately and contact
your local dealer.
WARNING
ALWAYS recover the refrigerant. Do NOT release them
directly into the environment. Use a vacuum pump to
evacuate the installation.
WARNING
After all the piping has been connected, make sure there is
no gas leak. Use nitrogen to perform a gas leak detection.
The ambient temperature inside the unit can get much
higher than that of the room, e.g. 70°C. In case of a brine
leak, hot parts inside the unit can create a hazardous
situation.
NOTICE
WARNING
NOTICE
▪ To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
▪ When the refrigerant system is to be opened,
refrigerant MUST be treated according to the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
Make sure there is no oxygen in the system. Refrigerant
may only be charged after performing the leak test and the
vacuum drying.
▪ In case re-charge is required, refer to the nameplate of the unit. It
states the type of refrigerant and necessary amount.
The use and installation of the application MUST comply
with the safety and environmental precautions specified in
the applicable legislation.
1.2.5
Water
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
NOTICE
Make sure water quality complies with EU directive
98/83 EC.
▪ The unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe
sizes and pipe lengths some systems require additional charging
of refrigerant.
▪ Only use tools exclusively for the refrigerant type used in the
system, this to ensure pressure resistance and prevent foreign
materials from entering into the system.
▪ Charge the liquid refrigerant as follows:
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
5
2 About the documentation
1.2.6
Electrical
NOTICE
Precautions when laying power wiring:
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
▪ Turn OFF all power supply before removing the
switch box cover, connecting electrical wiring or
touching electrical parts.
▪ Disconnect the power supply for more than 1 minute,
and measure the voltage at the terminals of main circuit
capacitors or electrical components before servicing.
The voltage MUST be less than 50 V DC before you
can touch electrical components. For the location of the
terminals, see the wiring diagram.
▪ Do NOT connect wiring of different thicknesses to the
power terminal block (slack in the power wiring may
cause abnormal heat).
▪ When connecting wiring which is the same thickness,
do as shown in the figure above.
▪ Do NOT touch electrical components with wet hands.
▪ For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect
firmly, then secure to prevent outside pressure being
exerted on the terminal board.
▪ Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service
cover is removed.
▪ Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the
terminal screws. A screwdriver with a small head will
damage the head and make proper tightening
impossible.
WARNING
If NOT factory installed, a main switch or other means for
disconnection, having a contact separation in all poles
providing full disconnection under overvoltage category III
condition, MUST be installed in the fixed wiring.
▪ Over-tightening the terminal screws may break them.
WARNING
WARNING
▪ After finishing the electrical work, confirm that each
electrical component and terminal inside the electrical
components box is connected securely.
▪ ONLY use copper wires.
▪ Make sure the field wiring complies with the applicable
legislation.
▪ Make sure all covers are closed before starting up the
unit.
▪ All field wiring MUST be performed in accordance with
the wiring diagram supplied with the product.
NOTICE
▪ NEVER squeeze bundled cables and make sure they
do NOT come in contact with the piping and sharp
edges. Make sure no external pressure is applied to the
terminal connections.
Only applicable if the power supply is three‑phase, and the
compressor has an ON/OFF starting method.
If there exists the possibility of reversed phase after a
momentary black out and the power goes on and off while
the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally. Running the product in reversed
phase can break the compressor and other parts.
▪ Make sure to install earth wiring. Do NOT earth the unit
to a utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock.
▪ Make sure to use a dedicated power circuit. NEVER
use a power supply shared by another appliance.
▪ Make sure to install the required fuses or circuit
breakers.
2
About the documentation
▪ Make sure to install an earth leakage protector. Failure
to do so may cause electric shock or fire.
2.1
About this document
▪ When installing the earth leakage protector, make sure
it is compatible with the inverter (resistant to high
frequency electric noise) to avoid unnecessary opening
of the earth leakage protector.
Target audience
Authorised installers
Documentation set
This document is part of a documentation set. The complete set
consists of:
▪ General safety precautions:
▪ Safety instructions that you must read before installing
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Indoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Outdoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
▪ Installer reference guide:
▪ Preparation of the installation, good practices, reference data,…
▪ Format: Digital files on http://www.daikineurope.com/supportand-manuals/product-information/
Installer reference guide
6
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
3 About the box
▪ Addendum book for optional equipment:
▪ Additional info about how to install optional equipment
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit) + Digital files on
http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/productinformation/
Keep the following in mind:
▪ At delivery, the unit MUST be checked for damage. Any damage
MUST be reported immediately to the carrier's claims agent.
▪ Bring the packed unit as close as possible to its final installation
position to prevent damage during transport.
Latest revisions of the supplied documentation may be available on
the regional Daikin website or via your dealer.
▪ Prepare the path along which you want to bring the unit inside in
advance.
The original documentation is written in English. All other languages
are translations.
3.2
Outdoor unit
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit
Technical engineering data
▪ A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional
Daikin website (publicly accessible).
▪ The full set of latest technical data is available on the Daikin
extranet (authentication required).
2.2
1
2
Installer reference guide at a
glance
Chapter
Description
General safety
precautions
Safety instructions that you must read
before installing
About the documentation
What documentation exists for the
installer
About the box
How to unpack the units and remove
their accessories
About the units and
options
▪ How to identify the units
Application guidelines
Various installation setups of the system
Preparation
What to do and know before going
on‑site
Installation
What to do and know to install the
system
Configuration
What to do and know to configure the
system after it is installed
Commissioning
What to do and know to commission the
system after it is configured
Hand‑over to the user
What to give and explain to the user
Maintenance and service
How to maintain and service the units
Troubleshooting
What to do in case of problems
Disposal
How to dispose of the system
Technical data
Specifications of the system
Glossary
Definition of terms
Field settings table
Table to be filled in by the installer, and
kept for future reference
▪ Possible combinations of units and
options
3.2.2
To handle the outdoor unit
CAUTION
To avoid injury, do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium
fins of the unit.
1
Handle the unit using the sling to the left and the handle to the
right. Pull up both sides of the sling at the same time to prevent
disconnection of the sling from the unit.
1
2
1
Note: There is also an installer settings
table in the user reference guide. This
table has to be filled in by the installer
and handed over to the user.
3
About the box
3.1
Overview: About the box
This chapter describes what you have to do after the boxes with the
outdoor and indoor unit are delivered on-site.
It contains information about:
▪ Unpacking and handling the units
▪ Removing the accessories from the units
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
7
3 About the box
3.3
Indoor unit
3.3.1
To unpack the indoor unit
1
2
2
While handling the unit:
▪ Keep both sides of the sling level.
▪ Keep your back straight.
3
After mounting the unit, remove the sling from the unit by pulling
1 side of the sling.
3.2.3
8×
To remove the accessories from the
outdoor unit
1
Lift the outdoor unit. See "3.2.2 To handle the outdoor unit" on
page 7.
2
Remove the accessories at the bottom of the package.
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the
indoor unit
a
b
2×
c
1×
a
b
1×
1×
c
d
1×
1×
ENERG
a
b
c
d
e
f
Y IJA
IE IA
ENERG
e
2×
1×
d
1×
e
1×
f
g
1×
4×
h
4×
i
1×
f
1×
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Y IJA
IE IA
Outdoor unit installation manual
Fluorinated greenhouse gases label
Multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label
Energy label
Unit mounting plate
Bolts, nuts, washers, spring washers and wire clamp
h
i
3.3.3
Shut-off valves for space heating water circuit
Overpressure bypass valve
General safety precautions
Addendum book for optional equipment
Indoor unit installation manual
Operation manual
Sealing rings for shut-off valves (space heating water
circuit)
Sealing rings for field-supplied shut-off valves (domestic
hot water circuit)
Sealing tape for low voltage wiring intake
To handle the indoor unit
Use the handles at the back and at the bottom to carry the unit.
a
a
b
a
b
Installer reference guide
8
b
Handles at the back of the unit
Handles at the bottom of the unit. Carefully tilt the unit to
the back so that the handles become visible.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
4 About the units and options
4
About the units and options
4.1
Overview: About the units and
options
This chapter contains information about:
▪ Identifying the outdoor unit
Code
Description
23
Integrated tank volume
DA
Model series
V
Model with single phase anti-legionella heater in
the domestic hot water tank. (Without backup
heater in the space heating circuit.)
G
G=Grey model
[blank]=White model
▪ Identifying the indoor unit
▪ Combining outdoor and indoor units
4.3
Combining units and options
▪ Combining the indoor unit with options
4.3.1
Possible options for the outdoor unit
4.2
Drain pan kit (EKDP008D)
▪ Combining the outdoor unit with options
Identification
The drain pan kit is required to gather the drain from the outdoor
unit. The drain pan kit consists of:
NOTICE
When installing or servicing several units at the same time,
make sure NOT to switch the service panels between
different models.
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit
▪ Drain pan
▪ Installation brackets
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan.
Drain pan heater (EKDPH008CA)
Location
The drain pan heater is required to avoid freezing-up of the drain
pan.
It is recommended to install this option in colder regions with
possible low ambient temperatures or heavy snowfall.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan heater.
U-beams (EKFT008D)
The U-beams are installation brackets on which the outdoor unit can
be installed.
Model identification
It is recommended to install this option in colder regions with
possible low ambient temperatures or heavy snowfall.
Example: ER G A 06 DA V3
Code
Explanation
ER
European split outdoor pair heat pump
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
outdoor unit.
G
Medium water temperature – ambient zone: −10~
−20°C
4.3.2
A
Refrigerant R32
User interface used as room thermostat (EKRUDAS)
06
Capacity class
DA
Model series
▪ The user interface used as room thermostat can only be used in
combination with the user interface connected to the indoor unit.
V3
Power supply
4.2.2
Possible options for the indoor unit
▪ The user interface used as room thermostat needs to be installed
in the room that you want to control.
Identification label: Indoor unit
Location
For installation instructions, see the installation and operation
manual of the user interface used as room thermostat.
Room thermostat (EKRTWA, EKRTR1)
You can connect an optional room thermostat to the indoor unit. This
thermostat can either be wired (EKRTWA) or wireless (EKRTR1).
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
Remote sensor for wireless thermostat (EKRTETS)
Model identification
You can use a wireless indoor temperature sensor (EKRTETS) only
in combination with the wireless thermostat (EKRTR1).
Example: E HV H 04 S 23 DA V G
Code
Description
E
European model
For installation intructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
HV
Floor-standing indoor unit with integrated tank
Digital I/O PCB (EKRP1HB)
H
H=Heating only
The digital I/O PCB is required to provide following signals:
04
Capacity class
▪ Alarm output
S
Integrated tank material: Stainless steel
▪ Space heating/cooling On/OFF output
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
9
5 Application guidelines
▪ Changeover to external heat source
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the digital
I/O PCB and addendum book for optional equipment.
Demand PCB (EKRP1AHTA)
To enable the power saving consumption control by digital inputs
you must install the demand PCB.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
demand PCB and addendum book for optional equipment.
Remote indoor sensor (KRCS01-1)
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
LAN adapter for smartphone control (BRP069A62)
You can install this LAN adapter to control the system via a
smartphone app.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
4.3.3
By default the internal user interface sensor will be used as room
temperature sensor.
As an option the remote indoor sensor can be installed to measure
the room temperature on another location.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
indoor sensor and addendum book for optional equipment.
INFORMATION
▪ The remote indoor sensor can only be used in case the
user interface is configured with room thermostat
functionality.
▪ You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor
or the remote outdoor sensor.
Possible combinations of indoor unit and
outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
ERGA04
ERGA06
ERGA08
EHVH04
O
—
—
EHVH08
—
O
O
5
Application guidelines
5.1
Overview: Application guidelines
The purpose of the application guidelines is to give a glance of the
possibilities of the Daikin heat pump system.
Remote outdoor sensor (EKRSCA1)
NOTICE
By default the sensor inside the outdoor unit will be used to measure
the outdoor temperature.
▪ The illustrations in the application guidelines are meant
for reference only, and are NOT to be used as detailed
hydraulic
diagrams.
The
detailed
hydraulic
dimensioning and balancing are NOT shown, and are
the responsibility of the installer.
As an option the remote outdoor sensor can be installed to measure
the outdoor temperature on another location (e.g. to avoid direct
sunlight) to have an improved system behaviour.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
outdoor sensor.
▪ For more information about the configuration settings to
optimize heat pump operation, see "8 Configuration" on
page 48.
INFORMATION
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
This chapter contains application guidelines for:
▪ Setting up the space heating system
PC configurator (EKPCCAB)
▪ Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating
The PC cable makes a connection between the switch box of the
indoor unit and a PC. It gives the possibility to update the software of
the indoor unit.
▪ Setting up the domestic hot water tank
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the PC
cable and "8 Configuration" on page 48.
▪ Setting up the energy metering
▪ Setting up the power consumption
▪ Setting up an external temperature sensor
Pipe bend kit (EKHVTC)
When the indoor unit is installed in a place with limited space, a pipe
bend kit can be installed to facilitate the connection to the refrigerant
liquid and gas connections of the indoor unit.
For installation instructions, see the instruction sheet of the pipe
bend kit.
Heat pump convector (FWXV)
For installation instructions, refer to the installation manual of the
heat pump convectors, and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
Backup heater (EKLBUHCB6W1)
You can install an optional backup heater.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
backup heater and addendum book for optional equipment.
LAN adapter for smartphone control + Smart Grid applications
(BRP069A61)
You can install this LAN adapter to:
▪ Control the system via a smartphone app.
5.2
Setting up the space heating
system
The Daikin heat pump system supplies leaving water to heat
emitters in one or more rooms.
Because the system offers a wide flexibility to control the
temperature in each room, you need to answer the following
questions first:
▪ How many rooms are heated by the Daikin heat pump system?
▪ Which heat emitter types are used in each room and what is their
design leaving water temperature?
Once the space heating requirements are clear, Daikin recommends
to follow the setup guidelines below.
NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
▪ Use the system in various Smart Grid applications.
Installer reference guide
10
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
INFORMATION
In case an external room thermostat is used and room frost
protection needs to be guaranteed in all conditions, then
you have to set Emergency [9.5] to Automatic.
5.2.1
Under floor heating or radiators – Wireless room
thermostat
Setup
A
B
Single room
Under floor heating or radiators – Wired room
thermostat
Setup
a
A
B
b
A
B
a
b
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the wireless external room
thermostat (optional equipment EKRTR1).
a
A
B
a
Configuration
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface used as room thermostat
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user
interface used as a room thermostat (optional equipment
EKRUDAS).
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
2 (Room thermostat): Unit
operation is decided based on
the ambient temperature of the
user interface.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
Receiver for wireless external room thermostat
Wireless external room thermostat
0 (Single zone): Main
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
1 (External room thermostat):
Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (1 contact): When the used
main zone:
external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [2.A]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
▪ #: [4.4]
Benefits
▪ Code: [7-02]
▪ Wireless. The Daikin external room thermostat is available in a
wireless version.
Benefits
▪ Highest comfort and efficiency. The smart room thermostat
functionality can decrease or increase the desired leaving water
temperature based on the actual room temperature (modulation).
This results in:
▪ Stable room temperature matching the desired temperature
(higher comfort)
▪ Less ON/OFF cycles (more quiet, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ Efficiency. Although the external room thermostat only sends ON/
OFF signals, it is specifically designed for the heat pump system.
Heat pump convectors
Setup
A
B
▪ Lowest possible leaving water temperature (higher efficiency)
▪ Easy. You can easily set the desired room temperature via the
user interface:
▪ For your daily needs, you can use preset values and schedules.
▪ To deviate from your daily needs, you can temporarily overrule
the preset values and schedules, use the holiday mode…
a
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating demand signal is sent to one digital input on
the indoor unit (X2M/35 and X2M/30).
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
11
5 Application guidelines
▪ The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by
one digital output on the indoor unit (X2M/4 and X2M/3).
Configuration
Setting
INFORMATION
Unit temperature control:
When using multiple heat pump convectors, make sure
each one receives the infrared signal from the remote
controller of the heat pump convectors.
▪ #: [2.9]
Value
1 (External room thermostat):
Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
1 (External room thermostat):
Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (1 contact): When the used
main zone:
external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [2.A]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
Benefits
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (1 contact): When the used
main zone:
external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [2.A]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
▪ Efficiency. Under floor heating has the best performance with
Altherma LT.
▪ Comfort. The combination of the two heat emitter types provides
excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating.
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone
Benefits
▪ Efficiency. Optimal energy efficiency because of the interlink
function.
▪ Stylish.
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
▪ Space heating is provided by:
▪ The under floor heating
If only one leaving water temperature zone is needed because the
design leaving water temperature of all heat emitters is the same,
you do NOT need a mixing valve station (cost effective).
Example: If the heat pump system is used to heat up one floor
where all the rooms have the same heat emitters.
Under floor heating or radiators – Thermostatic
valves
If you are heating up rooms with under floor heating or radiators, a
very common way is to control the temperature of the main room by
using a thermostat (this can either be the user interface or an
external room thermostat), while the other rooms are controlled by
so-called thermostatic valves, which open or close depending on the
room temperature.
▪ The heat pump convectors
Setup
Setup
A
B
A
B
C
T
a
a
A
B
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating demand signal is sent to one digital input on
the indoor unit (X2M/35 and X2M/30).
▪ The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by
one digital output on the indoor unit (X2M/4 and X2M/3).
Installer reference guide
12
▪ The under floor heating of the main room is directly connected to
the indoor unit.
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user
interface used as a room thermostat (optional equipment
EKRUDAS).
▪ A thermostatic valve is installed before the under floor heating in
each of the other rooms.
INFORMATION
Mind situations where the main room can be heated by
another heating source. Example: Fireplaces.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
Configuration
Setting
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the room thermostats.
Value
Unit temperature control:
2 (Room thermostat): Unit
operation is decided based on
the ambient temperature of the
user interface.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
Heat pump convectors - Multiple rooms
Setup
0 (Single zone): Main
A
B
C
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
▪ Easy. Same installation as for one room, but with thermostatic
valves.
a
Under floor heating or radiators – Multiple external
room thermostats
A
B
C
a
Setup
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
A
B
C
M1
M2
▪ The user interface connected on the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode.
b
a
A
B
C
a
b
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
External room thermostat
Bypass valve
▪ For each room, a shut-off valve (field supplied) is installed to avoid
leaving water supply when there is no heating demand.
▪ A bypass valve must be installed to make water recirculation
possible when all shut-off valves are closed. To guarantee reliable
operation, provide a minimum water flow as described in table "To
check the water volume and flow rate" in "6.4 Preparing water
piping" on page 25.
▪ The user interface connected on the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each room
thermostat must be set to match the indoor unit.
▪ The room thermostats are connected to the shut-off valves, but do
NOT have to be connected to the indoor unit. The indoor unit will
supply leaving water all the time, with the possibility to program a
leaving water schedule.
Configuration
Setting
▪ The heating demand signals of each heat pump convector are
connected in parallel to the digital input on the indoor unit (X2M/1
and X2M/4). The indoor unit will only supply leaving water
temperature when there is an actual demand.
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [2.9]
Value
1 (External room thermostat):
Unit operation is decided by the
external thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
Compared with heat pump convectors for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the remote controller of the
heat pump convectors.
Value
Unit temperature control:
0 (Leaving water): Unit operation
is decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ #: [4.4]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
Compared with under floor heating or radiators for one room:
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
13
5 Application guidelines
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
CAUTION
When there is more than one leaving water zone, you must
ALWAYS install a mixing valve station in the main zone to
decrease (in heating) the leaving water temperature when
the additional zone has demand.
Setup
A
B
Typical example:
C
Room (zone)
M1
Heat emitters: Design
temperature
Living room (main zone)
Under floor heating: 35°C
Bed rooms (additional zone)
Heat pump convectors: 45°C
Setup
a
A
B
C
a
b
b
A
B
C
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
External room thermostat
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
a
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The heat pump
convectors are directly connected to the indoor unit.
▪ For each room with under floor heating: A shut-off valve (field
supply) is installed before the under floor heating. It prevents hot
water supply when the room has no heating demand.
d
c
a
D
E
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The desired room
temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
▪ For each room with under floor heating: The desired room
temperature is set via the external room thermostat (wired or
wireless).
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each external
room thermostat and remote controller of the heat pump
convectors must be set to match the indoor unit.
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [2.9]
Value
0 (Leaving water): Unit operation
is decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
b
A
B
C
D
E
a
b
c
d
Additional leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 3
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
User interface used as room thermostat
Mixing valve station
Pressure regulating valve
INFORMATION
A pressure regulating valve should be implemented before
the mixing valve station. This is to guarantee the correct
water flow balance between the main leaving water
temperature zone and the additional leaving water
temperature zone in relation to the required capacity of
both water temperature zones.
▪ For the main zone:
0 (Single zone): Main
▪ A mixing valve station is installed before the under floor heating.
▪ Code: [7-02]
▪ The pump of the mixing valve station is controlled by the ON/
OFF signal on the indoor unit (X2M/29 and X2M/21; normal
closed shut-off valve output).
5.2.3
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which
is used as room thermostat (optional equipment EKRUDAS).
▪ #: [4.4]
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones
If the heat emitters selected for each room are designed for different
leaving water temperatures, you can use different leaving water
temperature zones (maximum 2).
In this document:
▪ Main zone = Zone with the lowest design temperature
▪ Additional zone = Zone with the highest design temperature
Installer reference guide
14
▪ For the additional zone:
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors for each room.
▪ The heating demand signals of each heat pump convector are
connected in parallel to the digital input on the indoor unit
(X2M/35 and X2M/30). The indoor unit will only supply the
desired additional leaving water temperature when there is an
actual demand.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each remote
controller of the heat pump convectors must be set to match the
indoor unit.
INFORMATION
▪ During heating operation of the heat pump, the
heat pump operates to achieve the desired
temperature set via the user interface. When weatherdependent operation is active, the water temperature is
determined automatically depending on the outdoor
temperature.
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
2 (Room thermostat): Unit
operation is decided based on
the ambient temperature of the
user interface.
▪ #: [2.9]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Note:
Setup
▪ Main room = user interface
used as room thermostat
functionality
▪ Integrate the auxiliary boiler as follows:
▪ Other rooms = external room
thermostat functionality
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ During heating operation of the auxiliary boiler, the
auxiliary boiler operates to achieve the desired water
temperature set via the auxiliary boiler controller.
a
b c
eg
f
h
j
M
1 (Dual zone): Main + additional
h
f
▪ #: [4.4]
i
▪ Code: [7-02]
In case of heat pump convectors: 1 (1 contact): When the used
external room thermostat or
External room thermostat for the
heat pump convector can only
additional zone:
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ #: [3.A]
condition.
k
l
d
▪ Code: [C-06]
Shut-off valve output
Set to follow the thermo demand
of the main zone.
At the mixing valve station
Set the desired main leaving
water temperature.
i
n
FHL1
m
FHL2
FHL3
Benefits
▪ Comfort.
▪ The smart room thermostat functionality can decrease or
increase the desired leaving water temperature based on the
actual room temperature (modulation).
▪ The combination of the two heat emitter systems provides the
excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating, and the
rapid air heat up of the heat pump convectors (e.g., living
room=under floor heating and the bedroom=convector (no
continuous heating)).
▪ Efficiency.
▪ Depending on the demand, the indoor unit supplies different
leaving water temperature matching the design temperature of
the different heat emitters.
▪ Under floor heating has the best performance with Altherma LT.
5.3
Setting up an auxiliary heat source
for space heating
▪ Space heating can be done by:
▪ The indoor unit
▪ An auxiliary boiler (field supply) connected to the system
▪ When the room thermostat requests heating, the indoor unit or the
auxiliary boiler starts operating depending on the outdoor
temperature (status of the changeover to external heat source).
When the permission is given to the auxiliary boiler, the space
heating by the indoor unit is turned OFF.
▪ Bivalent operation is only possible for space heating, NOT for
domestic hot water production. Domestic hot water is always
produced by the DHW tank connected to the indoor unit.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
FHL1...3
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Anti-legionella heater
Pump
Shut-off valve
Motorised 3‑way valve
Non-return valve (field supply)
Shut-off valve (field supply)
Collector (field supply)
Auxiliary boiler (field supply)
Aquastat valve (field supply)
DHW tank
Heat exchanger coil
Under floor heating
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary boiler and its integration in the
system complies with applicable legislation.
▪ Daikin is NOT responsible for incorrect or unsafe
situations in the auxiliary boiler system.
▪ Make sure the return water to the heat pump does NOT exceed
55°C. To do so:
▪ Set the desired water temperature via the auxiliary boiler
controller to maximum 55°C.
▪ Install an aquastat valve in the return water flow of the
heat pump.
▪ Set the aquastat valve to close above 55°C and to open below
55°C.
▪ Install non-return valves.
▪ Make sure to only have one expansion vessel in the water circuit.
An expansion vessel is already pre-mounted in the indoor unit.
▪ Install the digital I/O PCB (option EKRP1HB).
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
15
5 Application guidelines
▪ Connect X1 and X2 (changeover to external heat source) on the
digital I/O PCB to the auxiliary boiler thermostat.
▪ To setup the heat emitters, see "5.2 Setting up the space heating
system" on page 10.
Configuration
Via the user interface (quick wizard):
5.4
Setting up the domestic hot water
tank
The DHW tank is integrated in the indoor unit, and contains a 2.4 kW
anti-legionella heater. The anti-legionella heater contains 2 safeties:
a thermal cut-out and a thermal fuse. If a certain temperature is
exceeded, the safeties deactivate the anti-legionella heater.
▪ Set the use of a bivalent system as external heat source.
5.4.1
▪ Set the bivalent temperature and hysteresis.
System layout – Integrated DHW tank
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the bivalent hysteresis has enough
differential to prevent frequent changeover between
indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
a
b c
d
▪ Only possible in external room thermostat control AND one
leaving water temperature zone (see "5.2 Setting up the space
heating system" on page 10).
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
FHL1...3
UI
▪ The auxiliary contact can be:
▪ An outdoor temperature thermostat
▪ An electricity tariff contact
▪ A manually operated contact
▪ …
5.4.2
Com
Indoor
X2M
35 30
Indoor/Auto/Boiler
A
N
BTI
A
H
K1A
K2A
Indoor
Auto
Boiler
K1A
K2A
K1A
BTI
X Y
K2A
Boiler thermostat input
Auxiliary contact (normal closed)
Heating demand room thermostat (optional)
Auxiliary relay for activation of indoor unit (field supply)
Auxiliary relay for activation of boiler (field supply)
Indoor unit
Automatic
Boiler
FHL1
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Anti-legionella heater
Pump
Motorised 3‑way valve
DHW tank
Shut-off valve
Collector (field supply)
Under floor heating
User interface
Selecting the volume and desired
temperature for the DHW tank
Selecting the desired temperature for the DHW tank consists of:
1
Determining the DHW consumption (equivalent hot water
volume at 40°C).
2
Determining the desired temperature for the DHW tank.
Determining the DHW consumption
Answer the following questions and calculate the DHW consumption
(equivalent hot water volume at 40°C) using typical water volumes:
Question
▪ If the auxiliary contact is an outdoor temperature
thermostat, install the thermostat in the shadow so that
it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF by direct
sunlight.
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
FHL3
People experience water as hot when its temperature is 40°C.
Therefore, the DHW consumption is always expressed as equivalent
hot water volume at 40°C. However, you can set the DHW tank
temperature at a higher temperature (example: 53°C), which is then
mixed with cold water (example: 15°C).
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary contact has enough differential
or time delay to prevent frequent changeover between
indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
FHL2
g
Changeover to external heat source decided by an auxiliary
contact
H
i
e
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
L
hh
M
▪ Because the outdoor temperature is measured by the
outdoor unit air thermistor, install the outdoor unit in the
shadow so that it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF
by direct sunlight.
▪ Setup: Connect the following field wiring:
UI
f
Typical water volume
How many showers are needed
per day?
1 shower = 10 min×10 l/min =
100 l
How many baths are needed per 1 bath = 150 l
day?
How much water is needed at the 1 sink = 2 min×5 l/min = 10 l
kitchen sink per day?
Are there any other domestic hot —
water needs?
Example: If the DHW consumption of a family (4 persons) per day
is as follows:
▪ 3 showers
▪ 1 bath
▪ 3 sink volumes
Installer reference guide
16
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
Then the DHW consumption = (3×100 l)+(1×150 l)+(3×10 l)=480 l
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank
Formula
▪ For more information about optimizing the energy consumption for
producing domestic hot water, see "8 Configuration" on page 48.
5.4.4
DHW pump for instant hot water
Example
V1=V2+V2×(T2−40)/(40−T1)
Setup
If:
▪ T2=54°C
▪ V1=480 l
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
Then V2=307 l
Possible DHW tank volumes
Type
Possible volumes
Integrated DHW tank
▪ 230 l
g
a
b
c
f
g
h
i
j
If:
DHW consumption (equivalent hot water volume at 40°C)
Required DHW tank volume if only heated once
DHW tank temperature
Cold water temperature
f
b
Then V1=280 l
V1
V2
T2
T1
c
i
a
▪ T1=15°C
V2=V1×(40−T1)/(T2−T1)
h
j
▪ V2=180 l
Indoor unit
DHW tank
DHW pump (field supply)
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
Anti-legionella heater
▪ By connecting a DHW pump, instant hot water can be available at
the tap.
▪ The DHW pump and the installation are field supply and the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ For more information about connecting
connection: see "7 Installation" on page 29.
the
recirculation
Configuration
▪ For more information, see "8 Configuration" on page 48.
Energy saving tips
▪ If the DHW consumption differs from day to day, you can program
a weekly schedule with different desired DHW tank temperatures
for each day.
▪ You can program a schedule to control the DHW pump via the
user interface. For more information, see the user reference
guide.
▪ The lower the desired DHW tank temperature, the more cost
effective. By selecting a larger DHW tank, you can lower the
desired DHW tank temperature.
5.4.5
▪ The heat pump itself can produce domestic hot water of maximum
55°C (50°C if outdoor temperature is low). The electrical
resistance integrated in the DHW tank (anti-legionella heater) can
increase this temperature. However, this consumes more energy.
Daikin recommends to set the desired DHW tank temperature
below 55°C to avoid using the electrical resistance.
The anti-legionella heater:
Setup
▪ When the heat pump produces domestic hot water, it cannot heat
up a space. In case you need domestic hot water and space
heating at the same, Daikin recommends to produce the domestic
hot water during the night when there is lower space heating
demand.
5.4.3
Setup and configuration – DHW tank
▪ For large DHW consumptions, you can heat up the DHW tank
several times during the day.
▪ To heat up the DHW tank to the desired DHW tank temperature,
you can use the following energy sources:
i
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
▪ Can assist during defrost operation for the outdoor unit.
▪ If energy prices are lower during the night, Daikin recommends
to heat up the DHW tank during the night.
c
a
▪ Is used when the disinfection function for the DHW tank is
active.
▪ If energy prices are the same during the day and the night,
Daikin recommends to heat up the DHW tank during the day.
h
j
▪ Is used as emergency heater.
▪ The higher the outdoor temperature, the better the performance of
the heat pump.
DHW pump for disinfection
d
f
e
g
Indoor unit
DHW tank
DHW pump (field supply)
Heater element (field supply)
Non‑return valve (field supply)
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
Anti-legionella heater
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ The temperature of the DHW tank can be set to maximum 65°C. If
applicable legislation requires higher temperature for disinfection,
you can connect a DHW pump and heater element as shown
above.
▪ If applicable legislation requires disinfection of the water piping
until the tapping point, you can connect a DHW pump and heater
element (if needed) as shown above.
Configuration
The indoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more
information, see "8 Configuration" on page 48.
5.5
Setting up the energy metering
▪ Via the user interface, you can read out the following energy data:
▪ Thermodynamic cycle of the heat pump
▪ Produced heat
▪ Anti-legionella heater
▪ Consumed energy
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
17
5 Application guidelines
▪ You can read out the energy data:
INFORMATION
▪ Per month
When measuring the electrical power consumption, make
sure ALL power input of the system is covered by the
electrical power meters.
▪ Per year
INFORMATION
The calculated produced heat and consumed energy are
an estimation, the accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
5.5.1
5.5.3
General rule
One power meter that covers the entire system is sufficient.
Produced heat
Setup
INFORMATION
The sensors used to calculate the produced heat are
calibrated automatically.
Connect the power meter to X5M/5 and X5M/6.
Power meter type
In case of…
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ The produced heat is calculated internally based on:
▪ The leaving and entering water temperature
▪ The flow rate
▪ The power consumption of the anti-legionella heater in the
domestic hot water tank
▪ Setup and configuration:
▪ No additional equipment needed.
▪ Measure the capacity (resistance measurement) of the antilegionella heater and set the capacity via the user interface.
Example: If you measure an anti-legionella heater resistance of
24Ω, the capacity of the heater at 230 V is 2200 W.
5.5.2
Normal kWh rate power supply
Use a… power meter
▪ Single-phase outdoor unit
Single-phase
▪ No backup heater or backup
heater supplied from a singlephase grid
In other cases (i.e. a three-phase Three-phase
outdoor unit and/or a backup
heater connected to a threephase grid)
Example
Single-phase power meter
0 0 58
Consumed energy
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
You can use the following methods to determine the consumed
energy:
Three-phase power meter
a
b
▪ Calculating
▪ Measuring
c
0 5
1 0
a


c
c
b
c
d
INFORMATION
You cannot combine calculating the consumed energy
(example: for backup heater (if applicable)) and measuring
the consumed energy (example: for outdoor unit). If you do
so, the energy data will be invalid.
Calculating the consumed energy
▪ The consumed energy is calculated internally based on:
▪ The actual power input of the outdoor unit
▪ The set capacity of the backup heater (if applicable) and antilegionella heater
▪ The voltage
▪ Setup and configuration: To get accurate energy data, measure
the capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface for:
▪ The backup heater (step 1 and step 2) (if applicable)
d
e
C
f
A
g
B
h
C
A Outdoor unit
B Indoor unit
B Indoor unit
C DHW tank
C DHW tank
a Electrical cabinet (L1/N)
a Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N)
b Power meter (L1/N)
b Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
c Fuse (L1/N)
c Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
d Outdoor unit (L1/N)
d Fuse (L1/N)
e Indoor unit (L1/N)
e Outdoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
f Backup heater (L1/N)
f Indoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
g Anti-legionella heater (L1/N)
g Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
h Anti-legionella heater (L1/N)
Measuring the consumed energy
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ Preferred method because of higher accuracy.
▪ Requires external power meters.
▪ Setup and configuration: When using electrical power meters, set
the number of pulses/kWh for each power meter via the user
interface.
18
B
A Outdoor unit
▪ The anti-legionella heater
Installer reference guide
g
e f
A
Exception
▪ You can use a second power meter if:
▪ The power range of one meter is insufficient.
▪ The electrical meter cannot easily be installed in the electrical
cabinet.
▪ 230 V and 400 V three-phase grids are combined (very
uncommon), because of technical limitations of power meters.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
5 Application guidelines
▪ Connection and setup:
▪ The power limitation level can be expressed as:
▪ Connect the second power meter to X5M/3 and X5M/4.
▪ Maximum running current (in A)
▪ In the software the power consumption data of both meters is
added so you do NOT have to set which meter covers which
power consumption. You only need to set the number of pulses
of each power meter.
▪ Maximum power input (in kW)
▪ The power limitation level can be activated:
▪ Permanently
▪ By digital inputs
▪ See "5.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply" on page 19 for
an example with two power meters.
5.6.1
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply
General rule
▪ Power meter 1: Measures the outdoor unit.
▪ Power meter 2: Measures the rest (i.e. indoor unit, optional
backup heater, and anti-legionella heater).
Setup
Permanent power limitation
Permanent power limitation is useful to assure a maximum power or
current input of the system. In some countries, legislation limits the
maximum power consumption for space heating and DHW
production.
Pi
DI
a
▪ Connect power meter 1 to X5M/5 and X5M/6.
b
▪ Connect power meter 2 to X5M/3 and X5M/4.
Power meter types
t
▪ Power meter 1: Single- or three-phase power meter according to
the power supply of the outdoor unit.
Pi
t
DI
a
b
▪ Power meter 2:
Power input
Time
Digital input (power limitation level)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
▪ In case of no backup heater or a single-phase backup heater
configuration, use a single-phase power meter.
Setup and configuration
▪ In other cases, use a three-phase power meter.
▪ No additional equipment needed.
Example
Single-phase outdoor unit with a three-phase backup heater:
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [9.9] via the user
interface
(for
the
description
of
all
settings,
see
"8 Configuration" on page 48):
▪ Select continuous limitation mode
0 0 58
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
0 5
1 0
c
e
g
e
A
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
5.6
d


f
h
b
e
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A)
▪ Set the desired power limitation level
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital
inputs
Power limitation is also useful in combination with an energy
management system.
i
j
B
C
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
DHW tank
Electrical cabinet (L1/N): Preferential kWh rate power
supply
Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N): Normal kWh rate power
supply
Power meter (L1/N)
Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
Fuse (L1/N)
Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
Outdoor unit (L1/N)
Indoor unit (L1/N)
Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
Anti-legionella heater (L1/N)
The power or current of the entire Daikin system is limited
dynamically by digital inputs (maximum four steps). Each power
limitation level is set via the user interface by limiting one of the
following:
▪ Current (in A)
▪ Power input (in kW)
The energy management system (field supply) decides the activation
of a certain power limitation level. Example: To limit the maximum
power of the entire house (lighting, domestic appliances, space
heating…).
D
a
5
4
3
Setting up the power consumption
control
▪ The power consumption control:
▪ Allows you to limit the power consumption of the entire system
(sum of outdoor unit, indoor unit, anti-legionella heater, and
optional backup heater).
▪ Configuration: Set the power limitation level and how it has to
be achieved via the user interface.
A8P 21
b
A
B
A
B
C
D
a
C
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
DHW tank
Energy management system
Power limitation activation (4 digital inputs)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
19
5 Application guidelines
b
Pi
Ph
Anti-legionella heater
a
DI1
DI3
c
b
d
e
b
DI4
a
A
t
Pi
t
DI
a
b
Power input
Time
Digital inputs (power limitation levels)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
Ph
Ce
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
Setup
▪ Demand PCB (option EKRP1AHTA) needed.
▪ Maximum four digital inputs are
corresponding power limitation level:
used
to
activate
the
▪ DI1 = weakest limitation (highest energy consumption)
▪ DI4 = strongest limitation (lowest energy consumption)
▪ For the specifications of the digital inputs, and for where to
connect them, refer to the wiring diagram.
Configuration
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [9.9] via the user
interface
(for
the
description
of
all
settings,
see
"8 Configuration" on page 48):
▪ Select limitation by digital inputs.
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A).
▪ Set the desired power limitation level corresponding to each
digital input.
5.7
C
Ce
Produced heat
Consumed energy
Outdoor unit
Anti-legionella heater
Backup heater
Limited outdoor unit operation
Full outdoor unit operation
Anti-legionella heater turned ON
Backup heater step 1 turned ON
Backup heater step 2 turned ON
Setting up an external temperature
sensor
You can connect one external temperature sensor. It can measure
the indoor or outdoor ambient temperature. Daikin recommends to
use an external temperature sensor in the following cases:
Indoor ambient temperature
▪ In room thermostat control, the user interface used as room
thermostat (EKRUDAS) measures the indoor ambient
temperature. Therefore, the user interface used as room
thermostat must be installed on a location:
▪ Where the average temperature in the room can be detected
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
▪ That is NOT near a heat source
INFORMATION
In case more than 1 digital input is closed (at the same
time), the digital input priority is fixed: DI4 priority>…>DI1.
5.6.3
B
Power limitation process
The outdoor unit has better efficiency than the electrical heaters.
Therefore, the electrical heaters are limited and turned OFF first.
The system limits power consumption in the following order:
1
Limits certain electrical heaters.
▪ That is NOT affected by outside air or air draught because of,
for example, door opening/closing
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
indoor sensor (option KRCS01-1).
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of
the remote indoor sensor.
▪ Configuration: Select room sensor [9.B].
Outdoor ambient temperature
Then set the priority heater
via the user interface to…
▪ In the outdoor unit, the outdoor ambient temperature is measured.
Therefore, the outdoor unit must be installed on a location:
Domestic hot water production Booster heater (Anti-legionella
heater).
▪ At the north side of the house or at the side of the house where
the most heat emitters are located
Result: The backup heater (if
applicable) will be turned OFF
first.
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
outdoor sensor (option EKRSCA1).
If… has priority
Space heating
Backup heater (if applicable).
Result: The anti-legionella
heater will be turned OFF first.
2
Turns OFF all electrical heaters.
3
4
Limits the outdoor unit.
Turns OFF the outdoor unit.
Example
If the configuration is as follows:
▪ Power limitation level does NOT allow operation of both antilegionella heater and backup heater (step 1 and step 2).
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of
the remote outdoor sensor.
▪ Configuration: Select outdoor sensor [9.B].
▪ When the power saving functionality of the outdoor unit is active
(see "8 Configuration" on page 48), the outdoor unit is turned
down to reduce standby energy losses. As a result, the outdoor
ambient temperature is NOT read out.
▪ If the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent, the
full time outdoor temperature measurement is important. This is
another reason to install the optional outdoor ambient temperature
sensor.
▪ Priority heater = Anti-legionella heater.
Then power consumption is limited as follows:
Installer reference guide
20
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
6 Preparation
INFORMATION
NOTICE
The external outdoor ambient sensor data (either averaged
or instantaneous) is used in the weather-dependent control
curves. To protect the outdoor unit, the internal sensor of
the outdoor unit is always used.
▪ Do NOT stack the units on each other.
▪ Do NOT hang the unit on a ceiling.
Strong winds (≥18 km/h) blowing against the outdoor unit’s air outlet
causes short circuit (suction of discharge air). This may result in:
▪ deterioration of the operational capacity;
6
Preparation
6.1
▪ frequent frost acceleration in heating operation;
▪ disruption of operation due to decrease of low pressure or
increase of high pressure;
Overview: Preparation
This chapter describes what you have to do and know before going
on-site.
It contains information about:
▪ Preparing the installation site
▪ a broken fan (if a strong wind blows continuously on the fan, it
may start rotating very fast, until it breaks).
It is recommended to install a baffle plate when the air outlet is
exposed to wind.
▪ Preparing the refrigerant piping
It is recommended to install the outdoor unit with the air inlet facing
the wall and NOT directly exposed to the wind.
▪ Preparing the water piping
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ Preparing the electrical wiring
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
Note: If the sound is measured under actual installation
conditions, the measured value might be higher than the sound
pressure level mentioned in Sound spectrum in the data book due
to environmental noise and sound reflections.
6.2
Preparing the installation site
Do NOT install the unit in places often used as work place. In case
of construction works (e.g. grinding works) where a lot of dust is
created, the unit MUST be covered.
Choose an installation location with sufficient space for carrying the
unit in and out of the site.
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
It is NOT recommended to install the unit in the following places
because it may shorten the life of the unit:
WARNING
The appliance shall be stored in a room without
continuously operating ignition sources (example: open
flames, an operating gas appliance or an operating electric
heater).
WARNING
DO NOT reuse refrigerant piping that has been used with
any other refrigerant. Replace the refrigerant pipes or
clean thoroughly.
▪ Where the voltage fluctuates a lot
▪ In vehicles or vessels
▪ Where acidic or alkaline vapour is present
Seaside installation. Make sure the outdoor unit is NOT directly
exposed to sea winds. This is to prevent corrosion caused by high
levels of salt in the air, which might shorten the life of the unit.
Install the outdoor unit away from direct sea winds.
Example: Behind the building.
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit
b
INFORMATION
a
c
Also read the following requirements:
▪ General installation site requirements.
"General safety precautions" chapter.
See
the
▪ Refrigerant piping requirements (length, height
difference). See further in this "Preparation" chapter.
Mind the following spacing guidelines:
>250
>350
▪ Height of windbreaker≥1.5×height of outdoor unit
b
a
>250
(mm)
▪ Mind the service space requirements when installing the
windbreaker.
d
>350
≤1200
b >250
a
If the outdoor unit is exposed to direct sea winds, install a
windbreaker.
b
(mm)
a
a
b
c
d
c
Air outlet
Air inlet
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
21
6 Preparation
a
b
c
d
Sea wind
Building
Outdoor unit
Windbreaker
The outdoor unit is designed for outdoor installation only, and for the
following ambient temperatures:
Cooling mode
10~43°C
Heating mode
–25~25°C
6.2.2
In heavy snowfall areas it is very important to select an installation
site where the snow will NOT affect the unit. If lateral snowfall is
possible, make sure that the heat exchanger coil is NOT affected by
the snow. If necessary, install a snow cover or shed and a pedestal.
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the
indoor unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
Additional installation site requirements
of the outdoor unit in cold climates
In areas with low ambient temperatures and high humidity, or in
areas with heavy snowfall, remove the suction grille to ensure proper
operation.
Non-exhaustive list of areas: Austria, Czech Republic, Denmark,
Estonia, Finland, Germany, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Norway,
Poland, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Sweden, …
1
Remove the screws holding the suction grille.
2
Remove the suction grille, and dispose of it.
3
Reattach the screws to the unit.
▪ The indoor unit is designed for indoor installation only and for the
following ambient temperatures:
▪ Space heating operation: 5~30°C
▪ Domestic hot water production: 5~35°C
▪ Mind the following measurements guidelines:
Maximum refrigerant piping length between indoor
unit and outdoor unit
30 m
Minimum refrigerant piping length between indoor
unit and outdoor unit
3 m
Maximum height difference between indoor unit and
outdoor unit
20 m
≥300
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
4×
1
3
2
a
≥500
≥600
(mm)
INFORMATION
a
Suction grille
Protect the outdoor unit against direct snowfall and take care that the
outdoor unit is NEVER snowed up.
If you have limited installation space, do the following
before installing the unit in its final position: "7.8.5 To
connect the drain hose to the drain" on page 40. It
requires to remove one or both side panels.
▪ The foundation must be strong enough to bear the weight of the
unit. Take the weight of the unit with a domestic hot water tank full
of water into account.
Make sure, in the event of a water leak, water cannot cause any
damage to the installation space and surroundings.
a
Do NOT install the unit in places such as:
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
c
d
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
b
e
c
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
▪ In places where frost is possible. Ambient temperature around the
indoor unit must be >5°C.
a
b
c
d
e
Snow cover or shed
Pedestal
Prevailing wind direction
Air outlet
EKFT008D option kit
In any case, provide at least 300 mm of free space below the unit.
Additionally, make sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above
the maximum expected level of snow. See "7.3 Mounting the
outdoor unit" on page 31 for more details.
Installer reference guide
22
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
6 Preparation
Special requirements for R32
WARNING
▪ Do NOT pierce or burn.
▪ Do NOT use means to accelerate the defrosting
process or to clean the equipment, other than those
recommended by the manufacturer.
▪ Be aware that R32 refrigerant does NOT contain an
odour.
WARNING
The appliance shall be stored so as to prevent mechanical
damage and in a well-ventilated room without continuously
operating ignition sources (example: open flames, an
operating gas appliance or an operating electric heater)
and have a room size as specified below.
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT re-use joints which have been used already.
▪ Joints made in installation between parts of refrigerant
system shall be accessible for maintenance purposes.
WARNING
Make sure installation, servicing, maintenance and repair
comply with instructions from Daikin and with applicable
legislation (for example national gas regulation) and are
executed only by authorised persons.
NOTICE
▪ Pipework shall be protected from physical damage.
▪ Installation of pipework shall be kept to a minimum.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
23
6 Preparation
If the total refrigerant charge in the system is <1.84 kg (i.e. if the piping length is <27 m), there are no additional minimum floor area
requirements.
If the total refrigerant charge in the system is ≥1.84 kg (i.e. if the piping length is ≥27 m), you need to comply with additional minimum
floor area requirements as described in the following flow chart. The flow chart uses the following tables: "14.5 Table 1 – Maximum refrigerant
charge allowed in a room: indoor unit" on page 95, "14.6 Table 2 – Minimum floor area: indoor unit" on page 95 and "14.7 Table 3 –
Minimum venting opening area for natural ventilation: indoor unit" on page 95.
INFORMATION
Multiple indoor units. If two or more indoor units are
installed in a room, you must consider the maximum
refrigerant charge that can be released in the room when a
SINGLE leak occurs. Example: If two indoor units are
installed in the room, each with its own outdoor unit, then
you have to consider the refrigerant charge of the largest
indoor-outdoor combination.
a
Input from installer:
▪ Area of adjacent room B (Aroom B) (m2)
Input from installer:
▪ Total refrigerant charge (mc) (kg)
▪ Area of room A (Aroom A) (m2)
B
≥1.5 m
A
Start
a Indoor unit
A Room where the indoor unit is installed.
B Room adjacent to room A.
Use table 2 in chapter "Technical data" to
calculate the total minimum floor area
(Amin total) (m2) required for the total refrigerant
charge (mc).
Use table 1 in chapter "Technical data" to
calculate the maximum refrigerant charge
(mmax) (kg) allowed for room A.
Amin total≤Aroom A+Aroom B?
mmax≥mc?
No
No
Yes
Determine the refrigerant amount that exceeds
mmax (dm) (kg). (dm=mc–mmax)
Yes
The unit can be installed in room A, and
without further room size or ventilation
requirements.
Use table 3 in chapter "Technical data" and
dm to calculate the minimum opening area for
natural ventilation between room A and
room B (VAmin) (cm2).
Contact your dealer.
Unit can be installed at room A if:
▪ 2 ventilation openings (permanently open) are provided between room A and B, 1 at the top and 1 at the bottom.
▪ Bottom opening: The bottom opening must meet the minimum area requirements (VAmin). It must be as close as possible to the floor. If the ventilation opening
starts from the floor, the height must be ≥20 mm. The bottom of the opening must be situated ≤100 mm from the floor. At least 50% of the required opening
area must be situated <200 mm from the floor. The entire area of the opening must be situated <300 mm from the floor.
▪ Top opening: The area of the top opening must be larger than or equal to the bottom opening. The bottom of the top opening must be situated at least 1.5 m
above the top of the bottom opening.
▪ Ventilation openings to the outside are NOT considered suitable ventilation openings (the user can block them when it is cold).
Installer reference guide
24
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
6 Preparation
6.3
Preparing refrigerant piping
6.3.1
Refrigerant piping requirements
▪ Connecting piping – Force. Do NOT use excessive force when
connecting the piping. Deformation of the piping can cause
malfunctioning of the unit.
▪ Connecting piping – Tools. Only use appropriate tooling to
handle brass, which is a soft material. If NOT, pipes will get
damaged.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Piping material: Phosphoric acid deoxidised seamless copper.
▪ Piping diameter:
Ø6.4 mm (1/4")
Gas piping
Ø15.9 mm (5/8")
▪ Cover the pipe end when inserting it through a wall, to prevent
dust and/or particles entering the pipe.
▪ Use a decent thread sealant to seal connections.
▪ Piping temper grade and thickness:
Temper grade
Annealed (O)
≥0.8 mm
15.9 mm (5/8")
Annealed (O)
≥1.0 mm
6.3.2
▪ Closed circuit. Use the indoor unit ONLY in a closed water
system. Using the system in an open water system will lead to
excessive corrosion.
Thickness (t)(a)
6.4 mm (1/4")
(a)
Ø
t
Depending on the applicable legislation and the unit's
maximum working pressure (see "PS High" on the unit
name plate), larger piping thickness might be required.
Refrigerant piping insulation
▪ Use polyethylene foam as insulation material:
▪ with a heat transfer rate between 0.041 and 0.052 W/mK (0.035
and 0.045 kcal/mh°C)
▪ with a heat resistance of at least 120°C
▪ Insulation thickness
Pipe outer diameter
(Øp)
Insulation inner
diameter (Øi)
Insulation thickness
(t)
6.4 mm (1/4")
8~10 mm
10 mm
15.9 mm (5/8")
16~20 mm
13 mm
Øp
Øi
t
Preparing water piping
▪ Valve towards expansion vessel. The valve towards the
expansion vessel (if equipped) MUST be open.
6.4.1
▪ Glycol. For safety reasons, it is NOT allowed to add any kind of
glycol to the water circuit.
▪ Piping length. It is recommended to avoid long runs of piping
between the domestic hot water tank and the hot water end point
(shower, bath,…) and to avoid dead ends.
▪ Piping diameter. Select the water piping diameter in relation to
the required water flow and the available external static pressure
of the pump. See "14 Technical data" on page 89 for the external
static pressure curves of the indoor unit.
▪ Water flow. You can find the minimum required water flow for
indoor unit operation in the following table. In all cases, this flow
needs to be guaranteed. When the flow is lower, the indoor unit
will stop operation and display error 7H.
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
12 l/min
▪ Field supply components – Water. Only use materials that are
compatible with water used in the system and with the materials
used in the indoor unit.
▪ Field supply components – Water pressure and temperature.
Check that all components in the field piping can withstand the
water pressure and water temperature.
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
6.4
▪ Only use clean pipes
▪ Hold the pipe end downwards when removing burrs.
Liquid piping
Outer diameter
(Ø)
▪ Connecting piping – Air, moisture, dust. If air, moisture or dust
gets into the circuit, problems may occur. To prevent this:
Water circuit requirements
▪ Water pressure. The maximum water pressure is 4 bar. Provide
adequate safeguards in the water circuit to ensure that the
maximum pressure is NOT exceeded.
▪ Water temperature. All installed piping and piping accessories
(valve, connections,…) MUST withstand the following
temperatures:
INFORMATION
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
NOTICE
In case of plastic pipes, make sure they are fully oxygen
diffusion tight according to DIN 4726. The diffusion of
oxygen into the piping can lead to excessive corrosion.
▪ Connecting piping – Legislation. Make all piping connections in
accordance with the applicable legislation and the instructions in
the "Installation" chapter, respecting the water inlet and outlet.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
25
6 Preparation
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Disinfection. For the disinfection
function of the domestic hot water tank, see "8.4.6 Tank" on
page 61.
89°C
▪ Thermostatic mixing valves. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be necessary to install thermostatic mixing
valves.
b
j
dk
▪ Hygienic measures. The installation must be in compliance with
the applicable legislation and may require additional hygienic
installation measures.
i
75°C
▪ Recirculation pump. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be required to connect a recirculation pump in
between the hot water end point and the recirculation connection
of the domestic hot water tank.
i
a
c
g
f
h
FCU1
i
M
e M
f
FCU3
a
i
FHL1
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
FCU1...3
FHL1...3
FCU2
c
d
b
a
b
c
d
FHL2
FHL3
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Anti-legionella heater
Pump
Stop valve
Motorised 3-way valve
Motorised 2-way valve (field supply)
Collector
Domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger coil
Fan coil unit (optional) (field supply)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
Recirculation connection
Hot water connection
Shower
Recirculation pump
▪ Valve towards expansion vessel. The valve towards the
expansion vessel (if equipped) MUST be open.
6.4.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel
pre-pressure
The pre-pressure (Pg) of the vessel depends on the installation
height difference (H):
Pg=0.3+(H/10) (bar)
6.4.3
To check the water volume and flow rate
▪ Drainage – Low points. Provide drain taps at all low points of the
system in order to allow complete drainage of the water circuit.
The indoor unit has an expansion vessel of 10 litre with a factory-set
pre-pressure of 1 bar.
▪ Drainage – Pressure relief valve. Connect the drain hose
properly to the drain to avoid water dripping out of the unit. See
"7.8.5 To connect the drain hose to the drain" on page 40.
To make sure that the unit operates properly:
▪ Air vents. Provide air vents at all high points of the system, which
must also be easily accessible for servicing. Two automatic air
purges are provided in the indoor unit. Check that the air purges
are NOT tightened too much, so that automatic release of air in
the water circuit is possible.
▪ Zn-coated parts. Never use Zn-coated parts in the water circuit.
Because the unit's internal water circuit uses copper piping,
excessive corrosion may occur.
▪ You must check the minimum and maximum water volume.
▪ You might need to adjust the pre-pressure of the expansion
vessel.
Minimum water volume
Check that the total water volume in the installation is minimum
20 litres without backup heater and minimum 10 litres with optional
backup heater, the internal water volume of the indoor unit NOT
included.
INFORMATION
▪ Non-brass metallic piping. When using non-brass metallic
piping, insulate the brass and non-brass properly so that they do
NOT make contact with each other. This to prevent galvanic
corrosion.
In critical processes, or in rooms with a high heat load,
extra water might be required.
▪ Valve – Change‑over time. When using a 2-way valve or a 3-way
valve in the water circuit, the maximum change-over time of the
valve must be 60 seconds.
When circulation in each space heating/cooling loop is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum water volume is guaranteed, even if all of the
valves are closed.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Capacity. To avoid stagnation of
water, it is important that the storage capacity of the domestic hot
water tank meets the daily consumption of domestic hot water.
NOTICE
▪ Domestic hot water tank – After installation. Immediately after
installation, the domestic hot water tank must be flushed with fresh
water. This procedure must be repeated at least once a day the
first 5 consecutive days after installation.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Standstills. In cases where during
longer periods of time there is no consumption of hot water, the
equipment MUST be flushed with fresh water before usage.
Installer reference guide
26
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
6 Preparation
a
b c d
e
e
f
T1
g
T2
M1
M2
Installation
height
difference(a)
>7 m
T3
Do the following:
▪ Increase
the
prepressure according to
the
required
installation
height
difference. The prepressure
should
increase by 0.1 bar for
each metre above 7 m.
M3
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
FHL1...3
T1...3
M1...3
(a)
The expansion vessel of
the indoor unit is too
small for the installation.
In this case, it is
recommended to install
an extra vessel outside
the unit.
This is the height difference (m) between the highest point
of the water circuit and the indoor unit. If the indoor unit is
at the highest point of the installation, the installation height
is 0 m.
Minimum flow rate
Use the following graph to determine the maximum water volume for
the calculated pre-pressure.
a
Check that the minimum flow rate in the installation is guaranteed in
all conditions. This minimum flow rate is required during defrost/
backup heater operation (if applicable). For this purpose, use the
overpressure bypass valve delivered with the unit, and respect the
minimum water volume.
2.4
NOTICE
When circulation in each or certain space heating loops is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum flow rate is guaranteed, even if all valves are
closed. In case the minimum flow rate cannot be reached,
a flow error 7H will be generated (no heating or operation).
2
1.5
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
1
12 l/min
0.5
50
100
a
b
150
200
250
290
b
Pre-pressure (bar)
Maximum water volume (l)
Installation
height
difference(a)
No pre-pressure
adjustment is required.
Changing the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel
NOTICE
Water volume
≤200 l
See the recommended procedure as described in "9.4 Checklist
during commissioning" on page 76.
6.4.4
Example: Maximum water volume and expansion vessel prepressure
≤7 m
>200 l
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Pump
Shut-off valve
Collector (field supply)
Overpressure bypass valve (delivered as accessory)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
Individual room thermostat (optional)
Individual motorised valve to control loop FHL1...3 (field
supply)
Maximum water volume
0.3
20
Water volume
≤200 l
>200 l
Do the following:
▪ Decrease the prepressure according to
the required installation
height difference. The
pre-pressure
should
decrease by 0.1 bar for
each metre below 7 m.
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
Only a licensed installer may adjust the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel.
When changing the default pre-pressure of the expansion vessel
(1 bar) is required, take following guidelines into account:
▪ Only use dry nitrogen to set the expansion vessel pre-pressure.
▪ Inappropriate setting of the expansion vessel pre-pressure will
lead to malfunction of the system.
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel should be done
by releasing or increasing nitrogen pressure through the Schrader
valve of the expansion vessel.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
27
6 Preparation
WARNING
▪ All wiring MUST be performed by an authorised
electrician and MUST comply with the applicable
legislation.
▪ Make electrical connections to the fixed wiring.
▪ All components procured on the site and all electrical
construction MUST comply with the applicable
legislation.
a
WARNING
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply
and MUST be protected by the safety devices required by
the applicable legislation.
WARNING
a
6.4.5
Schrader valve
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
To check the water volume: Examples
Example 1
The indoor unit is installed 5 m below the highest point in the water
circuit. The total water volume in the water circuit is 100 l.
No actions or adjustments are required.
6.5.2
About preferential kWh rate power supply
Electricity companies throughout the world work hard to provide
reliable electric service at competitive prices and are often
authorized to bill clients at benefit rates. E.g. time-of-use rates,
seasonal rates, Wärmepumpentarif in Germany and Austria, ...
This equipment allows for connection to such preferential kWh rate
power supply delivery systems.
Example 2
Actions:
Consult with the electricity company acting as provider at the site
where this equipment is to be installed to know whether it is
appropriate to connect the equipment in one of the preferential kWh
rate power supply delivery systems available, if any.
▪ Because the total water volume (250 l) is more than the default
water volume (200 l), the pre-pressure must be decreased.
When the equipment is connected to such preferential kWh rate
power supply, the electricity company is allowed to:
▪ The required pre-pressure is:
Pg = (0.3+(H/10)) bar = (0.3+(0/10)) bar=0.3 bar.
▪ interrupt power supply to the equipment for certain periods of time;
The indoor unit is installed at the highest point in the water circuit.
The total water volume in the water circuit is 250 l.
▪ The corresponding maximum water volume at 0.3 bar is 290 l.
(See the graph in the chapter above).
▪ Because 250 l is lower than 290 l, the expansion vessel is
appropriate for the installation.
6.5
Preparing electrical wiring
6.5.1
About preparing electrical wiring
▪ demand that the equipment only consumes a limited amount of
electricity during certain periods of time.
Whether the power supply is interrupted or not, the wiring to the unit
is different.
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
WARNING
▪ If the power supply has a missing or wrong N-phase,
equipment might break down.
▪ Establish proper earthing. Do NOT earth the unit to a
utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earthing may cause electrical shock.
▪ Install the required fuses or circuit breakers.
▪ Secure the electrical wiring with cable ties so that the
cables do NOT come in contact with sharp edges or
piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
▪ Do NOT use taped wires, stranded conductor wires,
extension cords, or connections from a star system.
They can cause overheating, electrical shock or fire.
▪ Do NOT install a phase advancing capacitor, because
this unit is equipped with an inverter. A phase
advancing capacitor will reduce performance and may
cause accidents.
Installer reference guide
28
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
6.5.3
Overview of electrical connections except
external actuators
Normal power
supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply is
NOT interrupted
b
a
0 0 58
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
3
Power supply is
interrupted
1
3
2
a
0 0 580
0 5
1 0
4
1
5
b
0 0 580
1 50
3
4
1 50
1
2
2
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is
interrupted
immediately or after
some time by the
electricity company.
In this case, the
Remark: The
indoor unit must be
electricity company
must always allow the powered by a
power consumption separate normal
power supply.
of the indoor unit.
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is NOT
interrupted. The
outdoor unit is turned
off by the control.
a
b
1
2
3
4
5
6.5.4
Item
Normal power supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply for outdoor unit
Power supply and interconnection cable to indoor unit
Power supply for backup heater
Preferential kWh rate power supply (voltage free contact)
Normal kWh rate power supply (to power the indoor unit
PCB in the event of power supply interruption of the
preferential kWh rate power supply)
Overview of electrical connections for
external and internal actuators
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Outdoor unit and indoor unit power supply
Power supply for
outdoor unit
2
Power supply and
3
interconnection cable to
indoor unit
(f)
3
Power supply for antilegionella heater
2+GND
(c)
4
Preferential kWh rate
power supply (voltage
free contact)
2
(d)
5
2+GND
(a)
1
Normal kWh rate power 2
supply
6.3 A
Optional equipment
Item
10
Description
Heat pump convector
Wires
Maximum
running
current
2
100 mA(b)
Field supplied components
11
Shut-off valve
2
100 mA(b)
12
Electricity meter
2 (per meter)
(b)
13
Domestic hot water
pump
2
(b)
14
Alarm output
2
(b)
15
Changeover to external 2
heat source control
(b)
16
Space cool/heat
operation control
2
(b)
17
Power consumption
digital inputs
2 (per input
signal)
(b)
18
Safety thermostat
2
(d)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Refer to name plate on outdoor unit.
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
Cable section 2.5 mm².
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
50 m. Voltage-free contact shall ensure the minimum
applicable load of 15 V DC, 10 mA.
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
500 m.
Cable section 1.5 mm².
NOTICE
More technical specifications of the different connections
are indicated on the inside of the indoor unit.
7
Installation
7.1
Overview: Installation
This chapter describes what you have to do and know on-site to
install the system.
Typical workflow
Installation typically consists of the following stages:
1
Mounting the outdoor unit.
2
Mounting the indoor unit.
3
Connecting the refrigerant piping.
4
5
6
Checking the refrigerant piping.
Charging refrigerant.
Connecting the water piping.
7
8
9
Connecting the electrical wiring.
Finishing the outdoor installation.
Finishing the indoor installation.
INFORMATION
If you have limited installation space, do the following
before installing the unit in its final position: "7.8.5 To
connect the drain hose to the drain" on page 40. It
requires to remove one or both side panels.
INFORMATION
6
User interface used as 2
room thermostat
(e)
7
Room thermostat
3 or 4
100 mA(b)
8
Outdoor ambient
temperature sensor
2
(b)
9
Indoor ambient
temperature sensor
2
(b)
Depending on the units and/or the installation conditions, it
might be necessary to connect electrical wiring before you
can charge refrigerant.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
29
7 Installation
7.2
Opening the units
7.2.1
About opening the units
3
If necessary, remove the front plate. This is, for example,
necessary in the following cases:
▪ "7.2.5 To lower the switch box on the indoor unit" on
page 31
▪ "7.8.5 To connect the drain hose to the drain" on page 40
▪ When you need access to the high voltage switch box
At certain times, you have to open the unit. Example:
▪ When connecting the refrigerant piping
▪ When connecting the electrical wiring
▪ When maintaining or servicing the unit
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover
is removed.
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit
2×
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
T25
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
See "7.5.8 To connect the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit" on
page 36 and "7.9.6 To connect the electrical wiring on the outdoor
unit" on page 42.
7.2.3
1
To open the indoor unit
7.2.4
Remove the top panel.
To open the switch box cover of the
indoor unit
5×
T25
4×
T25
2
Remove the user interface panel. Open the hinges at the top
and slide the top panel upwards.
NOTICE
If you remove the user interface panel, also disconnect the
cables from the back of the panel to prevent damage.
1
1
2
3
Installer reference guide
30
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
7.3
Mounting the outdoor unit
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit
When
You have to mount the outdoor and indoor unit before you can
connect the refrigerant and water piping.
Typical workflow
Mounting the outdoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1
Providing the installation structure.
2
3
4
5
4×
T25
Installing the outdoor unit.
Providing drainage.
Preventing the unit from falling over.
Protecting the unit against snow and wind by installing a snow
cover and baffle plates. See "Preparing installation site" in
"6 Preparation" on page 21.
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor
unit
INFORMATION
7.2.5
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
To lower the switch box on the indoor unit
▪ General safety precautions
During the installation, you will need access to the inside of the
indoor unit. To have easier front access, put the switch box lower on
the unit as follows:
Prerequisite: The user interface panel and front panel have been
removed.
1
Remove the top panel that keeps the switch box into place at
the top of the unit.
2
Tilt the switch box to the front and lift it out of its hinges.
2×
▪ Preparation
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure
Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the
unit will not cause any operating vibration or noise.
Fix the unit securely by means of foundation bolts in accordance
with the foundation drawing.
This topic shows different installation structures. For all, use 4 sets
of M8 or M10 anchor bolts, nuts and washers. In any case, provide
at least 300 mm of free space below the unit. Additionally, make
sure the unit is positioned at least 100 mm above the maximum
expected level of snow.
T25
1
INFORMATION
The maximum height of the upper protruding part of the
bolts is 15 mm.
2
Option 1: On mounting feet "flexi-foot with strut"
0 mm
3
Place the switch box lower on the unit. Use the 2 hinges located
lower on the unit.
3
3
60
0
15
<
a
>300
0
0
>100
30
(mm)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
31
7 Installation
a
Maximum snowfall height
Option 2: On plastic mounting feet
4×
In this case, you can use the bolts, nuts, washers and spring
washers delivered with the unit as accessories.
c
>2
50
b
>300
0 mm
Option 3: On a pedestal with the EKFT008D option kit
a
The EKFT008D option kit is recommended in areas with heavy
snowfall.
0 mm
(mm)
a
b
c
Maximum snowfall height
EKFT008D option kit
Anti-vibration rubber (field supply)
0
60
0
15
<
>300
a
30
0
100
<
15
0
b
(mm)
a
b
Maximum snowfall height
EKFT008D option kit
Option 4: On brackets to the wall with the EKFT008D option kit
The EKFT008D option kit is recommended in areas with heavy
snowfall.
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit
CAUTION
Do NOT remove the protective cardboard before the unit is
installed properly.
1
Lift the outdoor unit as described in "3.2.2 To handle the
outdoor unit" on page 7.
2
Install the outdoor unit as follows:
▪ (1) Put the unit into position (using the sling to the left and
the handle to the right).
▪ (2) Remove the sling (by pulling 1 side of the sling).
▪ (3) Fix the unit.
Installer reference guide
32
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
a
2
a
c
a
1
3
b
2×
a
a
b
c
Air outlet
Drain pan
U-beams
Drain hole insulation
NOTICE
Properly align the unit. Make sure the backside of the unit
does NOT protrude.
3
Remove the protective cardboard and instruction sheet.
b
a
b
7.3.5
Protective cardboard
Instruction sheet
To provide drainage
▪ Make sure that condensation water can be evacuated properly.
▪ Install the unit on a base to make sure that there is proper
drainage in order to avoid ice accumulation.
▪ Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation to drain
waste water away from the unit.
▪ Avoid drain water flowing over the footpath, so that it does NOT
become slippery in case of ambient freezing temperatures.
▪ If you install the unit on a frame, install a waterproof plate within
150 mm of the bottom side of the unit in order to prevent water
from getting into the unit and to avoid drain water dripping (see the
following figure).
5m
60
35
0
m
m
a
m
▪ Drain pan heater. You can use the drain pan heater option
(EKDPH008CA) to prevent freezing-up of the drain pan. For the
installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan heater.
▪ Non-heated drain tube. When using the drain pan heater without
drain tube or with a non-heated drain tube, remove the drain hole
insulation (Item c on the illustration).
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling
over
In case the unit is installed in places where strong wind can tilt the
unit, take following measure:
1
Prepare 2 cables as indicated in the following illustration (field
supply).
2
Place the 2 cables over the outdoor unit.
3
Insert a rubber sheet between the cables and the outdoor unit
to prevent the cable from scratching the paint (field supply).
4
Attach the cable’s ends. Tighten those ends.
NOTICE
If the drain holes of the outdoor unit are blocked up,
provide space of at least 300 mm below the outdoor unit.
▪ Drain pan. You can use the drain pan option (EKDP008D) to
gather the drain water. For the complete installation instructions,
see the installation manual of the drain pan. In short, the drain pan
must be installed level (with a tolerance of 1° at all sides) and as
follows:
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
33
7 Installation
NOTICE
Do NOT tilt the unit forwards:
1° 1°
0°
7.4
Mounting the indoor unit
7.4.1
About mounting the indoor unit
7.5
Connecting the refrigerant piping
7.5.1
About connecting the refrigerant piping
Before connecting the refrigerant piping
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted.
Typical workflow
When
Connecting the refrigerant piping involves:
You have to mount the outdoor and indoor unit before you can
connect the refrigerant and water piping.
▪ Connecting the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit
▪ Connecting the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit
Typical workflow
Mounting the indoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1
Installing the indoor unit.
▪ Insulating the refrigerant piping
▪ Keeping in mind the guidelines for:
▪ Pipe bending
7.4.2
Precautions when mounting the indoor
unit
▪ Brazing
▪ Using the stop valves
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
7.5.2
Precautions when connecting the
refrigerant piping
INFORMATION
▪ Preparation
7.4.3
▪ Flaring pipe ends
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
To install the indoor unit
1
Lift the indoor unit from the pallet and place it on the floor. Also
see "3.3.3 To handle the indoor unit" on page 8.
2
Connect the drain hose to the drain. See "7.8.5 To connect the
drain hose to the drain" on page 40.
3
Slide the indoor unit into position.
4
Adjust the height of the leveling feet to compensate for floor
irregularities. The maximum allowed deviation is 1°.
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
CAUTION
≤1°
▪ Do NOT use mineral oil on flared part.
▪ Do NOT reuse piping from previous installations.
▪ NEVER install a drier to this R32 unit to guarantee its
lifetime. The drying material may dissolve and damage
the system.
Installer reference guide
34
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
NOTICE
Piping size
(mm)
Take the following precautions on refrigerant piping into
account:
▪ Avoid anything but the designated refrigerant to get
mixed into the refrigerant cycle (e.g. air).
Tightening
Flare
torque (N•m) dimensions (A)
(mm)
Ø6.4
15~17
8.7~9.1
Ø15.9
63~75
19.3~19.7
Flare shape
(mm)
90°±2
45 ±
° 2
A
R=0.4~0.8
▪ Only use R32 when adding refrigerant.
▪ Only use installation tools (e.g. manifold gauge set) that
are exclusively used for R32 installations to withstand
the pressure and to prevent foreign materials (e.g.
mineral oils and moisture) from mixing into the system.
▪ Install the piping so that the flare is NOT subjected to
mechanical stress.
▪ Protect the piping as described in the following table to
prevent dirt, liquid or dust from entering the piping.
7.5.4
Pipe bending guidelines
Use a pipe bender for bending. All pipe bends should be as gentle
as possible (bending radius should be 30~40 mm or larger).
7.5.5
To flare the pipe end
CAUTION
▪ Use caution when passing copper tubes through walls
(see figure below).
▪ Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
▪ Do NOT re-use flares. Use new flares to prevent
refrigerant gas leakage.
▪ Use flare nuts that are included with the unit. Using
different flare nuts may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
Unit
Installation period
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
7.5.3
1
Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2
Remove burrs with the cut surface facing down so that the
chips do NOT enter the pipe.
Protection method
>1 month
Pinch the pipe
<1 month
Pinch or tape the pipe
Regardless of the
period
a
b
a
b
INFORMATION
3
Do NOT open the refrigerant stop valve before checking
the refrigerant piping. When you need to charge additional
refrigerant it is recommended to open the refrigerant stop
valve after charging.
Remove the flare nut from the stop valve and put the flare nut
on the pipe.
4
Flare the pipe. Set exactly at the position as shown in the
following figure.
A
Guidelines when connecting the
refrigerant piping
Flare tool for R32
(clutch type)
Take the following guidelines into account when connecting pipes:
▪ Coat the flare inner surface with ether oil or ester oil when
connecting a flare nut. Tighten 3 or 4 turns by hand, before
tightening firmly.
A
5
0~0.5 mm
c
▪ ALWAYS use a spanner and torque wrench together to tighten the
flare nut when connecting the piping. This to prevent nut cracking
and leaks.
a
b
c
7.5.6
(Imperial-type)
1.0~1.5 mm
1.5~2.0 mm
Flare’s inner surface MUST be flawless.
The pipe end MUST be evenly flared in a perfect circle.
Make sure the flare nut is fitted.
To braze the pipe end
The indoor unit and outdoor unit have flare connections. Connect
both ends without brazing. If brazing should be needed, take the
following into account:
c
d
a
b
c
d
Wing nut type
(Ridgid-type)
b
▪ ALWAYS use 2 wrenches together when loosening a flare nut.
b
Conventional flare tool
Clutch type
Check that the flaring is properly made.
a
a
Cut exactly at right angles.
Remove burrs.
Torque wrench
Spanner
Piping union
Flare nut
▪ When brazing, blow through with nitrogen to prevent creation of
large quantities of oxidised film on the inside of the piping. This
film adversely affects valves and compressors in the refrigerating
system and prevents proper operation.
▪ Set the nitrogen pressure to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) (just enough so it
can be felt on the skin) with a pressure-reducing valve.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
35
7 Installation
a
b
c
d
e
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
To open/close the stop valve
1
Remove the stop valve cover.
2
Insert a hexagonal wrench (liquid side: 4 mm, gas side: 4 mm)
into the valve stem and turn the valve stem:
f
Refrigerant piping
Part to be brazed
Taping
Manual valve
Pressure-reducing valve
Nitrogen
▪ Do NOT use anti-oxidants when brazing pipe joints.
Residue can clog pipes and break equipment.
▪ Do NOT use flux when brazing copper-to-copper refrigerant
piping. Use phosphor copper brazing filler alloy (BCuP), which
does not require flux.
Flux has an extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping
systems. For instance, if chlorine based flux is used, it will cause
pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will
deteriorate the refrigerant oil.
7.5.7
Counterclockwise to open.
Clockwise to close.
3
When the stop valve CANNOT be turned any further, stop
turning. The valve is now open/closed.
To handle the stem cap
▪ The stem cap is sealed where indicated with the arrow. Do NOT
damage it.
Using the stop valve and service port
To handle the stop valve
Take the following guidelines into account:
▪ The stop valves are factory closed.
▪ The following figure shows the stop valve parts required when
handling the valve.
▪ After handling the stop valve, tighten the stem cap, and check for
refrigerant leaks.
Item
a
Tightening torque (N∙m)
Stem cap, liquid side
13.5~16.5
Stem cap, gas side
22.5~27.5
b
a
b
c
d
c
To handle the service cap
d
▪ ALWAYS use a charge hose equipped with a valve depressor pin,
since the service port is a Schrader type valve.
Service port and service port cap
Valve stem
Field piping connection
Stem cap
▪ After handling the service port, tighten the service port cap, and
check for refrigerant leaks.
▪ Keep both stop valves open during operation.
Item
▪ Do NOT apply excessive force to the valve stem. Doing so may
break the valve body.
▪ ALWAYS make sure to secure the stop valve with a spanner, then
loosen or tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench. Do NOT place
the spanner on the stem cap, as this could cause a refrigerant
leak.
Tightening torque (N∙m)
Service port cap
7.5.8
1
11.5~13.9
To connect the refrigerant piping to the
outdoor unit
Connect the liquid refrigerant connection from the indoor unit to
the liquid stop valve of the outdoor unit.
a
b
a
b
Spanner
Torque wrench
▪ When it is expected that the operating pressure will be low (e.g.
when cooling will be performed while the outside air temperature
is low), sufficiently seal the flare nut in the stop valve on the gas
line with silicon sealant to prevent freezing.
1×
Silicon sealant; make sure there is no gap.
Installer reference guide
36
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
If there is a possibility of moisture being present in the refrigerant
piping (for example, water may have entered the piping), first carry
out the vacuum drying procedure below until all moisture has been
removed.
a
b
c
7.6.2
a
b
c
2
Liquid stop valve
Gas stop valve
Service port
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
Connect the gas refrigerant connection from the indoor unit to
the gas stop valve of the outdoor unit.
▪ General safety precautions
NOTICE
▪ Preparation
It is recommended that the refrigerant piping between
indoor and outdoor unit is installed in a ducting or the
refrigerant piping is wrapped with finishing tape.
7.5.9
1
NOTICE
Use a 2-stage vacuum pump with a non-return valve that
can evacuate to a gauge pressure of −⁠100.7 kPa
(−⁠1.007 bar)(5 Torr absolute). Make sure the pump oil
does not flow oppositely into the system while the pump is
not working.
To connect the refrigerant piping to the
indoor unit
Connect the liquid stop valve from the outdoor unit to the
refrigerant liquid connection of the indoor unit.
NOTICE
b
a
Precautions when checking the
refrigerant piping
Use this vacuum pump for R32 exclusively. Using the
same pump for other refrigerants may damage the pump
and the unit.
NOTICE
▪ Connect the vacuum pump to the service port of the
gas stop valve.
a
b
2
▪ Make sure that the gas stop valve and liquid stop valve
are firmly closed before performing the leak test or
vacuum drying.
Refrigerant liquid connection
Refrigerant gas connection
Connect the gas stop valve from the outdoor unit to the
refrigerant gas connection of the indoor unit.
7.6.3
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do NOT exceed the unit's maximum working pressure (see
"PS High" on the unit name plate).
It is recommended that the refrigerant piping between
indoor and outdoor unit is installed in a ducting or the
refrigerant piping is wrapped with finishing tape.
NOTICE
Make sure to use a recommended bubble test solution
from your wholesaler. Do not use soap water, which may
cause cracking of flare nuts (soap water may contain salt,
which absorbs moisture that will freeze when the piping
gets cold), and/or lead to corrosion of flared joints (soap
water may contain ammonia which causes a corrosive
effect between the brass flare nut and the copper flare).
INFORMATION
When the indoor unit is installed in a place with limited
space, an optional pipe bend (EKHVTC) kit can be
installed to facilitate the connection to the refrigerant gas
and liquid connections of the indoor unit. For installation
instructions, see the instruction sheet of the pipe bend kit.
7.6
Checking the refrigerant piping
7.6.1
About checking the refrigerant piping
The outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping has been factory tested
for leaks. You only have to check the outdoor unit's external
refrigerant piping.
Before checking the refrigerant piping
Make sure the refrigerant piping is connected between the outdoor
unit and the indoor unit.
To check for leaks
1
Charge the system with nitrogen gas up to a gauge pressure of
at least 200 kPa (2 bar). It is recommended to pressurize to
3000 kPa (30 bar) in order to detect small leaks.
2
Check for leaks by applying the bubble test solution to all
connections.
3
Discharge all nitrogen gas.
7.6.4
To perform vacuum drying
Connect the vacuum pump and manifold as follows:
Typical workflow
Checking the refrigerant piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
2
Checking for leaks in the refrigerant piping.
Performing vacuum drying to remove all moisture, air or
nitrogen from the refrigerant piping.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
37
7 Installation
a
d
h
Charging additional refrigerant
Before charging additional refrigerant, make sure the outdoor unit's
external refrigerant piping is checked (leak test, vacuum drying).
b
c
INFORMATION
j
Depending on the units and/or the installation conditions, it
might be necessary to connect electrical wiring before you
can charge refrigerant.
e
Typical workflow – Charging additional refrigerant typically consists
of the following stages:
f
g h i
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
1 Determining if and how much you have to charge additionally.
Pressure meter
Gauge manifold
Low-pressure valve (Lo)
High-pressure valve (Hi)
Charging hoses
Vacuum pump
Service port
Valve lids
Gas stop valve
Liquid stop valve
2 If necessary, charging additional refrigerant.
3 Filling in the fluorinated greenhouse gases label, and fixing it to
the inside of the outdoor unit.
Completely recharging refrigerant
Before completely recharging refrigerant, make sure the following is
done:
1
Vacuum the system until the pressure on the manifold indicates
−0.1 MPa (−1 bar).
2
Leave as is for 4-5 minutes and check the pressure:
If the pressure…
Does not change
Increases
Then…
There is no moisture in the
system. This procedure is
finished.
1 All refrigerant is recovered from the system.
2 The outdoor unit's external refrigerant piping is checked (leak
test, vacuum drying).
3 Vacuum drying on the outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping is
performed.
NOTICE
Before completely recharging, perform vacuum drying on
the outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping as well.
There is moisture in the
system. Go to the next step.
Typical workflow – Completely recharging refrigerant typically
consists of the following stages:
3
Vacuum the system for at least 2 hours to a manifold pressure
of −0.1 MPa (−1 bar).
4
After turning the pump OFF, check the pressure for at least
1 hour.
2 Charging refrigerant.
If you do NOT reach the target vacuum or CANNOT maintain
the vacuum for 1 hour, do the following:
3 Filling in the fluorinated greenhouse gases label, and fixing it to
the inside of the outdoor unit.
▪ Check for leaks again.
▪ Perform vacuum drying again.
7.7.2
5
1 Determining how much refrigerant to charge.
Precautions when charging refrigerant
NOTICE
INFORMATION
Make sure to open the stop valves after installing the
refrigerant piping and performing vacuum drying. Running
the system with the stop valves closed may break the
compressor.
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
INFORMATION
After opening the stop valve, it is possible that the pressure
in the refrigerant piping does NOT increase. This might be
caused by e.g. the closed state of the expansion valve in
the outdoor unit circuit, but does NOT present any problem
for correct operation of the unit.
7.7
Charging refrigerant
7.7.1
About charging refrigerant
The outdoor unit is factory charged with refrigerant, but in some
cases the following might be necessary:
What
Charging additional refrigerant
When
7.7.3
To determine the additional refrigerant
amount
WARNING
If the total refrigerant charge in the system is ≥1.84 kg
(i.e. if the piping length is ≥27 m), you need to comply
with additional minimum floor area requirements for the
indoor unit. For more information, see "6.2.3 Installation
site requirements of the indoor unit" on page 22.
If the total liquid
piping length is…
Then…
≤10 m
Do NOT add additional refrigerant.
>10 m
R=(total length (m) of liquid
piping⁠–⁠10 m)×0.020
When the total liquid piping
length is more than specified
(see later).
R=Additional charge (kg)(rounded in units
of 0.1 kg)
Completely recharging refrigerant Example:
▪ When relocating the system.
▪ After a leak.
Installer reference guide
38
INFORMATION
Piping length is the one way length of liquid piping.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
7.7.4
To determine the complete recharge
amount
INFORMATION
If a complete recharge is necessary, the total refrigerant
charge is: the factory refrigerant charge (see unit name
plate) + the determined additional amount.
7.7.5
To charge additional refrigerant
7.8
Connecting the water piping
7.8.1
About connecting the water piping
Before connecting the water piping
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted. If applicable,
also make sure the backup heater is mounted.
Typical workflow
▪ R32 contains fluorinated greenhouse gases. Its global
warming potential (GWP) value is 675. Do NOT vent
these gases into the atmosphere.
Connecting the water piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Connecting the water piping to the indoor unit.
2
Connecting the water piping to the backup heater (if applicable).
3
Connecting the recirculation piping.
4
Connecting the drain hose to the drain.
5
Filling the water circuit.
▪ When charging refrigerant, ALWAYS use protective
gloves and safety glasses.
6
7
WARNING
▪ Only use R32 as refrigerant. Other substances may
cause explosions and accidents.
CAUTION
Filling the domestic hot water tank.
Insulating the water piping.
7.8.2
To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
Precautions when connecting the water
piping
INFORMATION
Prerequisite: Before charging refrigerant, make sure the refrigerant
piping is connected and checked (leak test and vacuum drying).
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
1
Connect the refrigerant cylinder to the service port.
2
Charge the additional refrigerant amount.
▪ General safety precautions
3
Open the gas stop valve.
▪ Preparation
If pump down is needed in case of dismantling or relocating the
system, see "13.2 To pump down" on page 87 for more details.
7.7.6
1
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping.
Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit.
Fill in the label as follows:
a
RXXX
1
kg
b
2 =
kg
c
1 + 2 =
kg
d
1
Install the shut-off valves on the space heating water pipes.
tCO2eq
e
2
Screw the indoor unit nuts on the shut-off valve.
3
Connect the domestic hot water in and out pipes to the indoor
unit.
GWP × kg
1000
a
b
c
d
e
f
To facilitate service and maintenance, 2 shut-off valves and 1
overpressure bypass valve are provided. Mount the shut-off valves
on the space heating water inlet and space heating water outlet. To
ensure the minimum flow rate (and prevent overpressure), install the
overpressure bypass valve on the space heating water outlet.
1 =
GWP: XXX
2
To connect the water piping
NOTICE
To fix the fluorinated greenhouse gases
label
Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases
f
7.8.3
=
If a multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label is
delivered with the unit (see accessories), peel off the
applicable language and stick it on top of a.
Factory refrigerant charge: see unit name plate
Additional refrigerant amount charged
Total refrigerant charge
Greenhouse gas emissions of the total refrigerant charge
expressed as tonnes CO2-equivalent
GWP = Global warming potential
c
d
a
b
NOTICE
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
2
Fix the label on the inside of the outdoor unit near the gas and
liquid stop valves.
NOTICE
It is recommended to install shut-off valves to domestic
cold water in and domestic hot water out connections.
These shut-off valves are field supplied.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
39
7 Installation
NOTICE
Overpressure bypass valve (delivered as accessory). We
recommend to install the overpressure bypass valve in the
space heating water circuit.
▪ Mind the minimum water volume when choosing the
installation location of the overpressure bypass valve
(at the indoor unit, or at the collector). See "6.4.3 To
check the water volume and flow rate" on page 26.
▪ Mind the minimum flow rate when adjusting the
overpressure bypass valve setting. See "6.4.3 To
check the water volume and flow rate" on page 26 and
"9.4.1 To check the minimum flow rate" on page 76.
NOTICE
A pressure relief valve (field supply) with an opening
pressure of maximum 10 bar must be installed on the
domestic cold water inlet connection in accordance with
the applicable legislation.
NOTICE
▪ A drain device and pressure relief device must be
installed on the cold water inlet connection of the
domestic hot water cylinder.
▪ To avoid back siphonage, it is recommended to install a
non-return valve on the water inlet of the domestic hot
water tank in accordance with the applicable legislation.
4
Reattach the top panel.
7.8.5
To connect the drain hose to the drain
Water coming from the pressure relief valve is collected in the drain
pan. The drain pan is connected to a drain hose inside the unit. You
must connect the drain hose to an appropriate drain according to the
applicable legislation. You can route the drain hose through the left
or right side panel.
Prerequisite: The user interface panel and front panel have been
removed.
1
Remove one of the side panels.
2
Cut out the rubber grommet.
3
Pull the drain hose through the hole.
4
Reattach the side panel. Ensure the water can flow through the
drain tube.
It is recommended to use a tundish to collect the water.
Option 1: Through the left side panel
▪ It is recommended to install a pressure reducing valve
on the cold water inlet in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
▪ An expansion vessel should be installed on the cold
water inlet in accordance with the applicable legislation.
▪ It is recommended to install the pressure relief valve on
a higher position than the top of the domestic hot water
tank. Heating of the domestic hot water tank causes
water to expand and without pressure relief valve the
water pressure inside the tank can rise above the tank
design pressure. Also the field installation (piping,
tapping points, etc.) connected to the tank is subjected
to this high pressure. To prevent this, a pressure
relieve valve needs to be installed. The overpressure
prevention depends on the correct operation of the field
installed pressure relief valve. If this is NOT working
correctly, overpressure will deform the tank and water
leakage may occur. To confirm good operation, regular
maintenance is required.
7.8.4
2
3×
T25
1
3
To connect the recirculation piping
Prerequisite: Only required if you need recirculation in your system.
1
Remove the top panel from the unit, see "7.2.3 To open the
indoor unit" on page 30.
2
Cut out the rubber grommet on top of the unit, and remove the
stop. The recirculation connector is placed below the hole.
3
Route the recirculation piping through the grommet and connect
it to the recirculation connector.
Installer reference guide
40
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
Option 2: Through the right side panel
Typical workflow
Connecting the electrical wiring typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Making sure the power supply system complies with the
electrical specifications of the heat pump.
2
Connecting the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit.
3
Connecting the electrical wiring to the indoor unit.
1
3
3×
T25
2
4
5
Connecting the main power supply.
Connecting the backup heater power supply.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Connecting the shut–off valves.
Connecting the electrical meters.
Connecting the domestic hot water pump.
Connecting the alarm output.
Connecting the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output.
Connecting the changeover to an external heat source.
Connecting the power consumption digital inputs.
13
Connecting the safety thermostat.
7.9.2
7.8.6
To fill the water circuit
To fill the water circuit, use a field supply filling kit. Make sure you
comply with the applicable legislation.
INFORMATION
Make sure both air purge valves (one on the magnetic filter
and one on the backup heater) are open.
7.8.7
To fill the domestic hot water tank
1
Open every hot water tap in turn to purge air from the system
pipe work.
2
Open the cold water supply valve.
3
Close all water taps after all air is purged.
4
Check for water leaks.
5
Manually operate the field-installed pressure relief valve to
ensure a free water flow through the discharge pipe.
Only for ERGA04~08DAV3 (not for ERGA04~08DAV3A)
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for harmonic
currents produced by equipment connected to public low-voltage
systems with input current >16 A and ≤75 A per phase.).
Only for indoor units with backup heater as an option
See "7.9.9 To connect the backup heater power supply" on
page 44.
7.9.3
Precautions when connecting the
electrical wiring
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
NOTICE
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
To operate the system, the domestic hot water tank needs
to be filled completely. Turning on the system when the
tank is not full can damage the integrated anti-legionella
heater and cause electrical errors.
7.8.8
About electrical compliance
To insulate the water piping
The piping in the complete water circuit MUST be insulated to
prevent condensation during defrost operation and reduction of the
heating capacity.
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
7.9
Connecting the electrical wiring
7.9.1
About connecting the electrical wiring
WARNING
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
7.9.4
Keep the following in mind:
▪ If stranded conductor wires are used, install a round crimp-style
terminal on the end of the wire. Place the round crimp-style
terminal on the wire up to the covered part and fasten the terminal
with the appropriate tool.
b
Before connecting the electrical wiring
Guidelines when connecting the electrical
wiring
a
a
b
Stranded conductor wire
Round crimp-style terminal
▪ Use the following methods for installing wires:
Make sure:
▪ The refrigerant piping is connected and checked
▪ The water piping is connected
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
41
7 Installation
Wire type
Installation method
cb
Single-core wire
A
AA´
A´
c
a
a
2×
a Curled single-core wire
b Screw
c Flat washer
cb
Stranded conductor
wire with round
crimp-style terminal
a
bc
B
B
2
a
Strip insulation (20 mm) from the wires.
a
b
a Terminal
b Screw
a
b
c Flat washer
O Allowed
3
X NOT allowed
Strip wire end to this point
Excessive strip length may cause electrical shock or
leakage.
Connect the interconnection cable and power supply as follows.
Ensure stress relief by using the wire clamp.
1N~ 50 Hz
220-240 V
Tightening torques
Item
Tightening torque (N•m)
M4 (X1M)
d
1.2~1.5
c
M4 (earth)
b
7.9.5
Specifications of standard wiring
components
a
Component
Power
supply
cable
ERGA04 +
06DAV3
MCA(a)
19.9 A
ERGA08DAV3 ERGA04~08D
AV3A
24.0 A
Voltage
15.9 A
Phase
1~
Frequen
cy
Wire
sizes
Must comply with applicable legislation
Minimum cable section of 1.5 mm² and
applicable for 230 V
Recommended
field fuse
20 A
Earth leakage
circuit breaker
Must comply with applicable legislation
7.9.6
1
25 A
L N PWR
1
2 3
L
N
16 A
MCA=Minimum circuit ampacity. Stated values are
maximum values (see electrical data of combination with
indoor units for exact values).
3×
a
To connect the electrical wiring on the
outdoor unit
12 3
a
Remove the switch box cover.
Installer reference guide
42
Interconnection cable
Power supply cable
Fuse
Earth leakage circuit breaker
50 Hz
Interconnection
cable
(a)
a
b
c
d
230 V
Wire clamp
4
Reattach the switch box cover.
5
Optional: Attach the wire clamp (accessory) to the screw of the
refrigerant piping cover, and fix the cables to it with a cable tie.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
Routing
Possible cables (depending on unit type
and installed options)
a
▪ Preferential power supply contact
Low voltage
▪ User interface used as room thermostat
(option)
▪ Power consumption digital inputs (field
supply)
1×
▪ Outdoor
(option)
1×
6
▪ Indoor ambient
(option)
Connect an earth leakage circuit breaker and fuse to the power
supply line.
7.9.7
1
2
d
ambient
To connect the electrical wiring on the
indoor unit
temperature
sensor
temperature
sensor
▪ Electrical meters (field supply)
▪ Safety thermostat (field supply)
▪ Backup heater thermistor (backup heater
option)
b
▪ Interconnection cable
To open the indoor unit, see "7.2.3 To open the indoor unit" on
page 30 and "7.2.4 To open the switch box cover of the indoor
unit" on page 30.
High voltage power
supply
▪ Normal kWh rate power supply
The wiring enters the unit from the top:
c
▪ Heat pump convector (option)
High voltage control
signal
▪ Room thermostat (option)
b+c
a
▪ Preferential kWh rate power supply
▪ Shut-off valve (field supply)
▪ Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
▪ Alarm output
▪ Changeover
control
to
external
heat
source
▪ Space heating operation control
▪ Backup heater thermal protector + backup
heater connection (backup heater option)
d
a, b, c
d
3
Field wiring (see table below)
Factory-mounted cable for power supply of anti-legionella
heater
▪ Power supply for anti-legionella heater
High voltage power
supply (factorymounted cable)
Routing of the wiring inside the unit should be as follows. Fix
the cable to the cable rail using cable ties:
CAUTION
b+c
4×
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
4
Seal the low voltage wiring intake using the sealing tape
(delivered as accessory).
Without low voltage cables
With low voltage cables
a
7.9.8
WARNING
Make sure that the electrical wiring does NOT touch the
refrigerant gas pipe, which can be very hot.
1
To connect the main power supply
Connect the main power supply.
In case of normal kWh rate power supply
a
a Refrigerant gas pipe
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
43
7 Installation
123
7.9.9
123
a
To connect the backup heater power
supply
WARNING
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply
and MUST be protected by the safety devices required by
the applicable legislation.
123
X11YA
X11Y
X1M
CAUTION
X2M
X11YB
X5M
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, always
connect the backup heater power supply and the earth
cable.
The backup heater capacity can vary, depending on the indoor unit
model. Make sure that the power supply is in accordance with the
backup heater capacity, as listed in the table below.
X1A
Backup
heater type
Legend: see illustration below.
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply
Backup
heater
capacity
Power
supply
Maximum
running
current
Zmax
*3V
3 kW
1N~ 230 V
13 A(b)
0.34 Ω
*6V
2 kW
1N~ 230 V
9 A
—
4 kW
1N~ 230 V
17 A(a)(b)
0.22 Ω
6 kW
1N~ 230 V
26 A(a)(b)
0.22 Ω
2 kW
3~ 230 V
5 A
—
4 kW
3~ 230 V
10 A
—
6 kW
3~ 230 V
15 A
—
3 kW
3N~ 400 V
4 A
—
6 kW
3N~ 400 V
9 A
—
9 kW
3N~ 400 V
13 A
—
Connect X11Y to X11YB.
123
NL
123
NL
a
b
S1S
c
*9W
123
56
X1M
X11YA
X11YB
X11Y
X2M
9 10
(a)
X5M
(b)
X1A
a
b
c
2
Interconnection cable (=main power supply)
Normal kWh rate power supply
Preferential power supply contact
Fix the cables with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
INFORMATION
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply, connect
X11Y to X11YB. The necessity of separate normal kWh
rate power supply to indoor unit (b) X2M/5+6 depends on
the type of preferential kWh rate power supply.
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000-3-12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for
harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to
public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and
≤75 A per phase.).
This equipment complies with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11
(European/International Technical Standard setting the
limits for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
public low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated
current ≤75 A) provided that the system impedance Zsys is
less than or equal to Zmax at the interface point between the
user's supply and the public system. It is the responsibility
of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by
consultation with the distribution network operator if
necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a
supply with a system impedance Zsys less than or equal to
Zmax.
Connect the backup heater power supply as follows:
a
Separate connection to the indoor unit is required:
▪ if preferential kWh rate power supply is interrupted
when active, OR
▪ if no power consumption of the indoor unit is allowed at
the preferential kWh rate power supply when active.
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/9+10) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
44
b
F1B
Q1DI
a
INFORMATION
Installer reference guide
X6M
b
Factory-mounted cable connected to the backup heater
contactor inside the switch box (K1M for *3V models; K5M
for *6V and *9W models)
Field wiring (see table below)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
Model (power
supply)
Connections to backup heater power
supply
*3V (1N~ 230 V)
K1M
SWB
2
4
1
3
Model (power
supply)
Connections to backup heater power
supply
*9W (3N~ 400 V)
K5M
SWB
X6M
2
4
6
14
1
3
5
13
X6M
1
3
1
F1B
I
I
2
F1B
4
I
2
3
I
4
5
I
6
7
I
8
Q1DI
Q1DI
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
*6V (1N~ 230 V)
K5M
SWB
L
N
2
4
6
14
1
3
5
13
3N~, 50 Hz
400 V AC
F1B
X6M
1
F1B
I
2
3
I
4
5
I
6
7
I
K1M
K5M
Q1DI
SWB
X6M
8
7.9.10
Q1DI
1
L1 L2 L3
N
Overcurrent fuse (field supply). Recommended fuse for *3V
models: 2‑pole; 20 A; curve 400 V; tripping class C.
Recommended fuse for *6V and *9W models: 4‑pole; 20 A;
curve 400 V; tripping class C.
Contactor (in the lower switch box)
Safety contactor (in the lower switch box)
Earth leakage circuit breaker (field supply)
Switch box
Terminal (field supply)
To connect the shut-off valve
Connect the valve control cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
NOTICE
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
*6V (3~ 230 V)
K5M
SWB
L
Wiring is different for a NC (normal closed) valve and a NO
(normal open) valve.
N
2
4
6
14
1
3
5
13
NO
NC
M2S
M2S
X6M
1
F1B
I
2
3
I
4
5
I
6
7
I
8
2
X2M
X2M
X1M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.11
Q1DI
3~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
21 29
21 28
X1M
To connect the electrical meters
INFORMATION
In case of an electrical meter with transistor output, check
the polarity. The positive polarity MUST be connected to
X5M/6 and X5M/4; the negative polarity to X5M/5 and
X5M/3.
L1 L2 L3
1
Connect the electrical meters cable to the appropriate terminals
as shown in the illustration below.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
45
7 Installation
S3S S2S
7 9
X2M
X1M
2
X5M
X2M
X1M
3 4 56
X5M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.12
YC
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
1
To connect the domestic hot water pump
Y2
M
1~
X1M
Connect the domestic hot water pump cable to the appropriate
terminals as shown in the illustration below.
a
M2P
2
1
2
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
To connect the changeover to external
heat source
Connect the changeover to external heat source cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X2M
X1M
a
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.15
12
A4P
NL
X5M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.13
1
To connect the alarm output
Connect the alarm output cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
X2M
X1M
X5M
7 9
X2M
X1M
X4 X3 X2 X1
X2M
X1M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
X5M
a
2
X1M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
YC
Y1
a
2
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.14
1
1
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
To connect the power consumption digital
inputs
Connect the power consumption digital inputs cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
To connect the space heating ON/OFF
output
Connect the space heating ON/OFF output cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
Installer reference guide
46
a
a
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.16
A4P
A4P
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
7 Installation
S6S
S7S
S8S
S9S
7.9.18
To connect the anti-legionella heater
power supply
WARNING
The anti-legionella heater MUST have a dedicated power
supply and MUST be protected by the safety devices
required by the applicable legislation.
CAUTION
X2M
X1M
X5M
A8P
X801M
12345
a
2
1
a
Make sure that the power supply is in accordance with the antilegionella heater capacity, as listed in the table below.
Anti-legionella
heater capacity
Power supply
Maximum running
current
2.4 kW
1N~ 230 V
11 A
Installation of EKRP1AHTA is required.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.17
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, always
connect the anti-legionella heater power supply and the
earth cable.
To connect the safety thermostat (normal
closed contact)
Connect the anti-legionella heater power supply cable as follows:
a
Connect the safety thermostat (normal closed) cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
X8M
F2B
b
Q1DI
a
Factory-mounted cable connected to the anti-legionella
heater contactor inside the lower switch box (K3M)
Field wiring (see below)
b
X1M
2
SWB 2
X2M
9 10
K3M
1
3
2
4
X5M
X8M
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
NOTICE
1
Make sure to select and install the safety thermostat
according to the applicable legislation.
3
F2B
I
In any case, to prevent unnecessary tripping of the safety
thermostat, it is recommended that …
2
I
4
Q1DI
▪ … the safety thermostat is automatically resettable.
▪ … the safety thermostat has a maximum temperature
variation rate of 2°C/min.
1N~, 50 Hz
230 V AC
▪ … there is a minimum distance of 2 m between the
safety thermostat and the 3‑way valve.
K3M
Q1DI
SWB 2
X8M
INFORMATION
After it is installed, do NOT forget to configure the safety
thermostat. Without configuration, the indoor unit will
ignore the safety thermostat contact.
N
Overcurrent fuse (field supply). Recommended: 2‑pole;
20 A; curve 400 V; tripping class C.
Contactor (in the lower switch box)
Earth leakage circuit breaker (field supply)
Lower switch box
Terminal (field supply)
7.10
Finishing the outdoor unit
installation
7.10.1
To finish the outdoor unit installation
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/9+10) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
L
F2B
1
Insulate and fix the refrigerant piping and interconnection cable
as follows:
c
a
b
f
d
e
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
47
8 Configuration
a
b
c
d
e
f
2
Gas pipe
Gas pipe insulation
Interconnection cable
Liquid pipe
Liquid pipe insulation
Finishing tape
Column in tables
#
Accessing settings via the code in the
overview field settings.
Install the service cover.
7.11
Method
Accessing settings via the breadcrumb in the
menu structure. To enable breadcrumbs,
press the button in the home screen.
Finishing the indoor unit
installation
Code
See also:
▪ "To access the installer settings" on page 48
▪ "8.6 Menu structure: Overview installer settings" on page 75
7.11.1
To close the indoor unit
8.1.1
To access the most used commands
1
Close the cover of the switch box.
2
Put the switch box back into place.
To change the user permission level
3
Reinstall the top panel.
You can change the user permission level as follows:
4
Reinstall the side panels.
1 Go to [B]: User profile.
5
Reinstall the front panel.
2 Enter the applicable code for the user permission.
6
Reconnect the cables to the user interface panel.
▪ Move the cursor from left to right.
7
Reinstall the user interface panel.
▪ Browse through the list of digits and change the
selected digit.
NOTICE
—
▪ Confirm the pincode and proceed.
When closing the indoor unit cover, make sure that the
tightening torque does NOT exceed 4.1 N•m.
Installer pin code
The Installer pin code is 5678. Additional menu items and installer
settings are now available.
8
Configuration
8.1
Overview: Configuration
Installer
5678
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to configure
the system after it is installed.
Why
Advanced user pin code
If you do NOT configure the system correctly, it might NOT work as
expected. The configuration influences the following:
▪ The calculations of the software
▪ What you can see on and do with the user interface
How
You can configure the system via the user interface.
▪ First time – Configuration wizard. When you turn ON the user
interface for the first time (via the indoor unit), the configuration
wizard starts to help you configure the system.
▪ Restart the configuration wizard. If the system is already
configured, you can restart the configuration wizard. To restart the
configuration wizard, go to Installer settings > Configuration
wizard. To access Installer settings, see "8.1.1 To access the
most used commands" on page 48.
▪ Afterwards. If necessary, you can make changes to the
configuration in the menu structure or the overview settings.
When the configuration wizard is finished, the user
interface will show an overview screen and request to
confirm. When confirmed, the system will restart and the
home screen will be displayed.
Accessing settings – Legend for tables
You can access the installer settings using two different methods.
However, NOT all settings are accessible via both methods. If so,
the corresponding table columns in this chapter are set to N/A (not
applicable).
48
User pin code
The User pin code is 0000.
To access the installer settings
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [9]: Installer settings.
To modify an overview setting
Example: Modify [1‑01] from 15 to 20.
All settings can be done using the menu structure. If for any reason it
is required to change a setting using the overview settings, then the
overview settings can be accessed as follows:
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 48.
—
2 Go to [9.I]: Installer settings > Overview field
settings.
INFORMATION
Installer reference guide
The Advanced user pin code is 1234. Additional menu items for the
user are now visible.
3 Turn the left dial to select the first part of the setting
and confirm by pressing the dial.
00
05
0A
0
01
06
0B
1
02
07
0C
2
03
08
0D
3
04
09
0E
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
4 Turn the left dial to select the second part of the
setting
1
For the setting…
Emitter type [2.7]
Control [2.9]
00
05
0A
01 15
06
0B
Setpoint mode [2.4]
02
07
0C
03
08
0D
Heating WD curve [2.5] (if
applicable)
04
09
0E
Schedule [2.1]
5 Turn the right dial to modify the value from 15 to 20.
Additional zone (only if [4.4]=1)
Emitter type [3.7]
1
00
05
0A
01 20
06
0B
02
07
0C
03
08
0D
04
09
0E
Refer to…
"8.4.3 Main zone" on
page 54
Control (read only) [3.9]
"8.4.4 Additional zone" on
page 57
Setpoint mode [3.4]
Heating WD curve [3.5] (if
applicable)
Schedule [3.1]
6 Press the left dial to confirm the new setting.
7 Press the center button to go back to the home
screen.
Heat up mode [5.6]
"8.4.6 Tank" on page 61
Comfort setpoint [5.2]
Eco setpoint [5.3]
INFORMATION
When you change the overview settings and you go back
to the home screen, the user interface will show a popup
screen and request to restart the system.
When confirmed, the system will restart and recent
changes will be applied.
8.2
Tank
Reheat setpoint [5.4]
8.3
Possible screens
8.3.1
Possible screens: Overview
The most common screens are as follows:
Configuration wizard
After first power ON of the system, the user interface will guide you
using the configuration wizard. This way you can set the most
important initial settings. This way the unit will be able to run
properly. Afterwards, more detailed settings can be done via the
menu structure if required.
a
You can find a short overview of the settings in the configuration
here. All the settings can also be adjusted in the settings menu (use
the breadcrumbs).
For the setting…
b
Refer to…
Language [7.1]
c
Time/date [7.2]
Hours
—
Minutes
+
Year
–
Month
c1
Day
a
b
c
System
Indoor unit type (read only)
"Backup heater" on page 66
Backup heater type [9.3.1]
c2
Home screen
Main menu screen
Lower level screens:
c1: Setpoint screen
c2: Detailed screen with values
Domestic hot water [9.2.1]
8.3.2
Emergency [9.5]
Number of zones [4.4]
"8.4.5 Space heating" on
page 58
Backup heater
Voltage [9.3.2]
"Backup heater" on page 66
Home screen
Press the
button to go back to the home screen. You see an
overview of the unit configuration and the room and setpoint
temperatures. Only symbols applicable for your configuration are
visible on the home screen.
Configuration [9.3.3]
Capacity step 1 [9.3.4]
Additional capacity step 2 [9.3.5]
(if applicable)
Main zone
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
49
8 Configuration
18 Feb 2018
22:19
j
i
h
55
d
18
c
b
21
g
f
6
1.6
bar
Item
e
i1
8.3.3
Enable/disable breadcrumbs.
Item
Description
21 21
The temperatures are shown in circles. If the circle
is grey, the corresponding operation (example:
space heating) is currently not active.
or
a2
Main menu screen
: Quiet mode active
Possible actions on this screen
a3 Measured ambient temperature
Go through the list.
Enter the submenu.
Space
operation
mode
c
Disinfection
/ Powerful
d ▪
Enable/disable breadcrumbs.
Item
indoor
unit
with
or
Malfunctioning
Room
Date / time
e Current date and time
Holiday
f
Main zone
g3 g4
▪
: Underfloor heating
g1 g2
▪
: Fancoil unit
▪
: Radiator
Additional zone
▪
: Daikin user interface used as room
thermostat
▪
: External control
Space heating/
cooling
Tank
h3
h1 h2
▪
: Underfloor heating
▪
: Fancoil unit
▪
: Radiator
▪
Installer reference guide
50
Restriction: Only displayed if a domestic
hot water tank is present.
Gives access to user settings such as
holiday mode and quiet mode.
Information
Displays data and information about the
indoor unit.
Installer settings
Restriction: Only for the installer.
Gives access to advanced settings.
Commissioning
Restriction: Only for the installer.
Perform tests and maintenance.
: External control
▪ Hidden: Leaving water temperature control
You cannot change the operation mode on
heating only models.
User settings
h2 Leaving water temperature setpoint
h3 Room thermostat type:
Shows the applicable symbol for your unit.
Set the domestic hot water tank
temperature.
▪ Hidden: Leaving water temperature control
g4 Measured room temperature
h1 Heat emitter type:
Restriction: Only displayed if there are two
leaving water temperature zones. Shows
the applicable symbol for your additional
zone emitter type.
Set the leaving water temperature for the
additional zone (if present).
g2 Leaving water temperature setpoint
g3 Room thermostat type:
Shows the applicable symbol for your main
zone emitter type.
Set the leaving water temperature for the
main zone.
: Holiday mode active
g1 Heat emitter type:
Restriction: Only displayed if a room
thermostat is connected to the indoor unit.
Set the room temperature.
: Disinfection mode active
: Powerful operation active
Description
Restriction: Only displayed if a malfunction
occurs.
See "12.4.1 To display the help text in case
of a malfunction" on page 85 for more
information.
: Heating
▪
Additional
zone
: A malfunction occurred
: Outdoor unit
Indoor unit / b1 Indoor unit:
domestic
hot water
tank
▪
: Floor-standing
integrated tank
b2
b2 Water pressure
b1
Main zone
j
In the home screen, press
to open the main menu screen.
From the main menu, you can access the different setpoint screens
and submenus.
Go to the main menu screen.
a1
i2
See "12.4.1 To display the help text in case of a
malfunction" on page 85 for more information.
Possible actions on this screen
a2 a3
: Domestic hot water
i2 Measured tank temperature
Malfunction
Go through the list of the main menu.
a1
i1
a
45
Outdoor
unit
Description
Domestic
hot water
User profile
Change the active user profile.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Item
Description
Operation
8.3.4
Possible actions on this screen
Turn heating functionality and domestic hot
water preparation on or off.
Change the value.
Go to the next setting.
Confirm changes and proceed.
Menu screen
8.3.7
Possible actions on this screen
Detailed screen with weather-dependent
curve
When weather dependent operation is active the desired tank
temperature is determined automatically depending on the averaged
outdoor temperature. When the outdoor temperature is lower the
tank temperature will need to be higher as the water pipes will be
colder and vice versa.
The weather-dependent curves are defined by two setpoints:
Go through the list.
▪ Setpoint (X1, Y2)
Enter the submenu/setting.
▪ Setpoint (X2, Y1)
8.3.5
Setpoint screen
Weather-dependent curve:
The setpoint screen is displayed for screens describing system
components that need a setpoint value.
a
Y
Y2
Example:
Y1
▪ Room temperature screen
X1
▪ Main zone screen
▪ Additional zone screen
a2
e
d
Go through the temperatures.
Change the temperature.
b2
d
e
a1
+
Go to the next temperature.
d
Confirm changes and proceed.
–
b1
Item
Description
a
Possible weather dependent zones:
Possible actions on this screen
Go through the list of the submenu.
Go to the submenu.
Adjust and automatically apply the desired
temperature.
Item
Description
Minimum temperature limit
Maximum temperature limit
a1
Fixed by the unit
a2
Restricted by the installer
b1
Fixed by the unit
b2
Restricted by the installer
Current temperature
c
Measured by the unit
Desired temperature
d
Turn the right dial to
increase/decrease.
Submenu
e
Turn or press the left dial to
go to the submenu.
8.3.6
X
Possible actions on this screen
▪ Tank temperature screen
c
X2
Detailed screen with values
▪
: Main zone or additional zone heating
▪
: Domestic hot water
X, X1, X2 Outdoor ambient temperature
Y, Y1, Y2 Desired tank temperature or leaving water temperature.
The symbol shown here corresponds to the heat emitter
for that zone:
8.3.8
▪
: Underfloor heating
▪
: Fan coil unit
▪
: Radiator
▪
: Domestic hot water tank
Schedule screen: Example
This example shows how to set a room temperature schedule in
heating mode for the main zone.
INFORMATION
The procedures to program other schedules are similar.
To program the schedule
Example: You want to program the following schedule:
User defined 1
a
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
b
a
b
Settings
Values
Possible actions on this screen
Go through the list of settings.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
51
8 Configuration
Prerequisite: The room temperature schedule is only available if
room thermostat control is active. If leaving water temperature
control is active, you can program the main zone schedule instead.
1
Go to the schedule.
2
Clear the contents of the schedule (optional).
3
Program the schedule for Monday.
4
Copy the schedule to the other weekdays.
5
Program the schedule for Saturday and copy it to Sunday.
6
Give the schedule a name.
To copy the schedule to the other weekdays:
1 Select Monday.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
2 Select Copy.
To go to the schedule:
Edit
1 Go to [1.1]: Room > Schedule.
Copy
2 Set scheduling to Yes.
3 Go to [1.2]: Room > Heating schedule.
To clear the contents of the schedule:
Result: "C" is displayed next to the copied day.
1 Select the name of the current schedule.
3 Select Tuesday.
User defined 1
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
2 Select Delete.
C
4 Select Paste.
C
Copy
Delete
Paste
Edit
3 Select OK to confirm.
Result:
To program the schedule for Monday:
User defined 1
C
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
1 Select Monday.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
5 Repeat this action for all other weekdays.
—
User defined 1
C
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
2 Select Edit.
Delete
Edit
Copy
To program the schedule for Saturday and copy it to Sunday:
3 Use the left dial to select an entry and edit the entry
with the right dial. You can program up to 6 actions
each day.
0
12
6:00 20°C
8:30 18°C
24
--:--
2 Select Edit.
3 Use the left dial to select an entry and edit the entry
with the right dial.
Mon
22:00 18°C
17:30 21°C
1 Select Saturday.
--
0
12
24
Sat
8:00 21°C
23:00 18°C
--:--
--
4 Confirm the changes.
4 Confirm the changes.
5 Select Saturday.
6 Select Copy.
Installer reference guide
52
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
You can set the room temperature heating schedule using the
schedule screen. For more information about this screen, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen: Example" on page 51.
7 Select Sunday.
8 Select Paste.
Result:
Antifrost
User defined 1
Room frost protection [1.4] prevents the room from getting too cold.
This setting behaves differently depending on the set unit control
method [2.9]. Perform actions according to the table below.
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
C
Main zone unit control
method [2.9]
To rename the schedule:
INFORMATION
Not all schedules can be renamed.
Leaving water temperature
control ([C 07]=0)
Room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
External room thermostat
control ([C 07]=1)
Allow for the external room
thermostat to take care of room
frost protection:
▪ Turn ON [C.2]: Space heating/
cooling
1 Select the name of the current schedule.
User defined 1
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Description
Room thermostat control ([C
07]=2)
Allow for the user interface used as
room thermostat to take care of
room frost protection:
▪ Choose [1.4.1]=1: Room
Antifrost > Activation > Yes
>
▪ Set the room antifrost setpoint
([1.4.2]): Room > Antifrost >
Room setpoint
2 Select the Rename option.
Delete
NOTICE
Rename
If the system does NOT contain a backup heater, then:
▪ Make sure that the room antifrost control is activated
([2-06]=1).
3 Browse through the character list and confirm the
selected character.
4 Confirm the new name.
8.4
▪ Make sure that the water pipe freeze prevention is
activated ([4-04]≠2).
Settings menu
INFORMATION
You can set additional settings using the main menu screen and its
submenus. The most important settings are presented here.
8.4.1
Room
You can control the room temperature of the main zone with the
setpoint screen, also see "8.3.5 Setpoint screen" on page 51.
Schedule
In this menu item you can indicate if the room temperature is
controlled with a schedule or not.
#
Code
N/A
Leaving water temperature control ([C‑07]=0)
Under leaving water temperature control, room frost protection is
NOT guaranteed. However, if room antifrost [1.4] is activated, limited
frost protection by the unit is possible:
If...
Setpoint screen
[1.1]
If a U4 error occurs, room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
For more detailed information about room frost protection in relation
to the applicable unit control method, see the sections below:
Malfunction
or
will appear on the home screen.
In case of a malfunction,
If you open the menu screen, the Malfunctioning menu will now be
visible. Open the menu to see the error code. Press to get more
information about the error.
8.4.2
▪ Do NOT change the default room antifrost temperature
[2-05].
Description
Space heating/cooling is OFF
and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C
Then...
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON and The unit will supply leaving water
the operation mode is "heating" to the heat emitters to heat up
the room according to normal
logic.
Schedule
External room thermostat control ([C‑07]=1)
▪ 0 No: Room temperature is controlled
by the user.
Under external room thermostat control, room frost protection is
guaranteed by the external room thermostat, provided that Space
heating/cooling [C.2] is turned ON and the emergency setting [9.5] is
set to automatic.
▪ 1 Yes: Room temperature is controlled
with a schedule and can be modified
by the user.
In case of one leaving water temperature zone:
Heating schedule
This is available for all models.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
53
8 Configuration
If...
Then...
Space heating/cooling is OFF
and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON, the
external room thermostat is
"Thermo OFF" and the outdoor
temperature drops below 4°C
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON and Room frost protection is
the external room thermostat is guaranteed by the normal logic.
"Thermo ON"
In case of two leaving water temperature zones:
If...
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
Space heating/cooling is ON, the
external room thermostat is
"Thermo OFF", the operation
mode is "heating" and the
outdoor temperature drops below
4°C
The unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up
the room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
During room thermostat control, room frost protection is guaranteed
if it is enabled. When room frost protection [2‑06] is activated and the
room temperature drops below the room antifrost temperature [2‑05],
the unit will supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat up the
room again.
Code
[2-06]
Description
Activation:
▪ 0 No: Antifrost functionality is OFF.
▪ 1 Yes: Antifrost functionality is on.
[1.4.2]
[2-05]
[1.5.2]
[3-06]
Heating maximum
Room sensor offset
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. You can
calibrate the (external) room temperature sensor. It is possible to
give an offset to the room thermistor value measured by the user
interface used as room thermostat or by the external room sensor.
The settings can be used to compensate for situations where the
user interface used as room thermostat or the external room sensor
CANNOT be installed on the ideal installation location (see
"5.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor" on page 20).
#
Code
[1.6]
[2-0A]
[1.7]
[2-09]
Room sensor offset (external room
sensor option): ONLY applicable if the
external room sensor option is installed
and configured.
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C
8.4.3
Main zone
You can set the leaving water temperature for the main zone using
the setpoint screen. For more information about how to do this, see
"8.3.5 Setpoint screen" on page 51.
Schedule
Indicates if the desired leaving water temperature is according to a
schedule. Influence of the LWT setpoint mode [2.4] is as follows:
▪ In Fixed LWT setpoint mode, the scheduled actions consist of
desired leaving water temperatures, either preset or custom.
▪ In Weather dependent LWT setpoint mode, the scheduled actions
consist of desired shift actions, either preset or custom.
#
[2.1]
Code
N/A
When the user interface used as room thermostat is
disconnected (due to miswiring, damage of the cable), then
room frost protection is NOT guaranteed.
Description
Schedule
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes
Heating schedule
NOTICE
If Emergency is set to Manual ([9.5]=0), and the unit is
triggered to start emergency operation, the unit will stop
and need to be recovered manually via the user interface.
To recover operation manually, go to the Malfunctioning
main menu screen, where the user interface will then ask
you to confirm emergency operation before starting.
Room frost protection is active even if the user does NOT
confirm emergency operation.
You can set the main zone heating temperature schedule using the
schedule screen. For more information about this screen, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen: Example" on page 51.
Setpoint mode
In Fixed mode, the desired leaving water temperature does NOT
depend on the outdoor ambient temperature.
In Weather dependent mode, the desired leaving water temperature
depends on the outdoor ambient temperature.
Setpoint range
#
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control. To save energy by
preventing overheating the room, you can limit the range of the room
temperature for heating.
[2.4]
Code
N/A
Description
Setpoint mode
▪ 0: Fixed
▪ 2: Weather dependent
NOTICE
When adjusting the room temperature ranges, all desired
room temperatures are also adjusted to guarantee they are
between the limits.
54
Description
Room sensor offset (user interface used
as room thermostat): Offset on the actual
room temperature measured on the user
interface used as room thermostat.
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C
Room setpoint 4°C~16°C
INFORMATION
Installer reference guide
Description
Heating minimum
Setpoint screen
Room thermostat control ([C‑07]=2)
#
Code
[3-07]
Then...
Space heating/cooling is OFF
and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C
[1.4.1]
#
[1.5.1]
When weather dependent operation is active, low outdoor
temperatures will result in warmer water and vice versa. During
weather dependent operation, the user has the possibility to shift the
water temperature up or down by a maximum of 10°C.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Heating WD curve
NOTICE
Set weather-dependent heating for the main zone (if [2.4] = 1 or 2):
The maximum setpoint in space heating depends on the
emitter type as can be seen in above table. If there are 2
water temperature zones, then the maximum setpoint is
the maximum of the 2 zones.
#
[2.5]
Code
[1-00]
[1-01]
Description
Set weather-dependent heating:
Tt
CAUTION
[1-02]
[1-03]
If there are 2 zones, it is important that the zone with the
lowest water temperature is configured as the main zone,
and the zone with the highest water temperature is
configured as the additional zone. Not configuring the
system in this way could cause damage to the heat
emitters.
[1-02]
[1-03]
[1-00]
[1-01]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main zone)
▪ [1-00]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. –40°C~+5°C
ambient
If there are 2 zones and the emitter types are wrongly
configured, water of high temperature can be sent towards
a low temperature emitter (underfloor heating). To avoid
this:
▪ [1-01]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
ambient
▪ Install an aquastat/thermostatic valve to avoid too high
temperatures towards a low temperature emitter.
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
▪ [1-02]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C
Note: This value should be higher
than [1‑03] as for low outdoor
temperatures
warmer
water
is
required.
▪ [1-03]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑01]°C~min(45, [9‑00])°C
Note: This value should be lower than
[1‑02]
as
for
high
outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
Emitter type
Depending on the system water volume and the heater emitter type
of the main zone, the heat up of the main zone can take longer. This
setting can compensate for a slow or a quick heating system during
the heat up cycle. The target delta T for the main zone will depend
on this setting.
In room thermostat control, this setting will influence the maximum
modulation of the desired leaving water temperature.
Therefore it is important to set this correctly and in accordance with
your system layout.
#
[2.7]
Code
[2‑0C]
Description
Emitter type
▪ 0: Underfloor heating
▪ 1: Fancoil unit
▪ 2: Radiator
The setting of the emitter type has an influence on the space heating
setpoint range and the target delta T in heating as follows:
Emitter type Main
zone
CAUTION
Space heating
setpoint range
[9‑01]~[9‑00]
Target delta T in
heating [1‑0B]
0: Underfloor heating Maximum 55°C
Variable (see [2.B])
1: Fancoil unit
Maximum 55°C
Variable (see [2.B])
2: Radiator
Maximum 65°C
Fixed 10°C
▪ Make sure you set the emitter types for the main zone
[2.7] and for the additional zone [3.7] correctly in
accordance with the connected emitter.
INFORMATION
Depending on the target delta T, the average emitter
temperature will vary. To counteract the effect on the
average emitter temperature due to a higher delta T target,
the leaving water setpoint (fixed or weather dependent)
can be adjusted.
Setpoint range
You can limit the range of the leaving water temperature for the main
leaving water temperature zone. The purpose of this setting is to
prevent a wrong (i.e. too hot or too cold) leaving water temperature.
Therefore, the available desired heating temperature range can be
configured.
NOTICE
In case of a floor heating application it is important to limit
the maximum leaving water temperature at heating
operation according to the specifications of the floor
heating installation.
NOTICE
▪ When adjusting the leaving water temperature ranges,
all desired leaving water temperatures are also
adjusted to guarantee they are between the limits.
▪ Always balance between the desired leaving water
temperature with the desired room temperature and/or
the capacity (according to the design and selection of
the heat emitters). The desired leaving water
temperature is the result of several settings (preset
values, shift values, weather dependent curves,
modulation). As a result, too high or too low leaving
water temperatures could occur which lead to
overtemperatures or capacity shortage. By limiting the
leaving water temperature range to adequate values
(depending on the heat emitter), such situations can be
avoided.
Example: Set the minimum leaving water temperature to 28°C to
avoid NOT to be able to heat up the room: leaving water
temperatures MUST be sufficiently higher than the room
temperatures (in heating).
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
55
8 Configuration
#
[2.A]
#
Code
Code
[C‑05]
▪ 1: 1 contact: The used external room
thermostat can only send a thermo
ON/OFF condition. There is no
separation between heating or cooling
demand. The room thermostat is
connected to only 1 digital input
(X2M/35).
Select this value in case of a
connection to the heat pump convector
(FWXV).
Description
Leaving water temperature range for the main leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature in heating operation)
[2.8.1]
[9-01]
Heating minimum 15°C~37°C
[2.8.2]
[9-00]
Heating maximum
▪ 2: 2 contacts: The used external room
thermostat can send a separate
heating/cooling
thermo
ON/OFF
condition. The room thermostat is
connected to 2 digital inputs (X2M/35
and X2M/34).
Select this value in case of a
connection to the wired (EKRTWA) or
wireless (EKRTR1) room thermostat
▪ [2‑0C]=2 (emitter type main zone =
radiator)
37°C~65°C
▪ Otherwise: 37°C~55°C
Control
For the control of the unit there are 3 possibilities:
Control
In this control...
Description
External room thermostat type for the
main zone:
Leaving water temperature: Delta T
Leaving water
Unit operation is decided based on the leaving
water temperature regardless the actual room
temperature and/or heating demand of the
room.
The target delta T in heating for the main zone depends on the
emitter type for the main zone selected above. In heating, this
setting indicates the temperature difference between the leaving
water setpoint and entering water.
External room
thermostat
Unit operation is decided by the external
thermostat or equivalent (e.g. heat pump
convector).
Room thermostat
Unit operation is decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface used as a
room thermostat.
The unit is designed to support under floor loops operation. The
recommended leaving water temperature for under floor loops is
35°C. In such case, the unit will be controlled to realize a
temperature difference of 5°C which means that the unit entering
water temperature is around 30°C. Depending on the installed
application (radiators, heat pump convector, under floor loops) or
situation, it can be possible to change the difference between
entering and leaving water temperature. Note that the pump will
regulate its flow to keep the delta T. In some special cases, the
measured delta T can be different from the set value.
#
[2.9]
Code
[C‑07]
Description
▪ 0: Leaving water
▪ 1: External room thermostat
INFORMATION
▪ 2: Room thermostat
When only the backup heater is active in heating, delta T
will be controlled according to the fixed capacity of the
backup heater. It is possible that this delta T is different
from the selected target delta T.
Thermostat type
Only applicable in external room thermostat control.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
In heating, the target delta T will only be achieved after
some operation time, when the setpoint is being reached,
because of the big difference between leaving water
temperature setpoint and inlet temperature at startup.
INFORMATION
If the main zone or the additional zone has a heating
demand, and this zone is equipped with radiators, then the
target delta T that the unit will use in heating operation will
be 10°C fixed.
If the zones are not equipped with radiators, then in
heating the unit will give priority to the target delta T for the
additional zone, if there is a heating demand in the
additional zone.
#
[2.B.1]
Code
[1‑0B]
Description
Delta T heating: A minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of heat emitters in heating
mode.
▪ If [2-0C]=2, this is fixed to 10°C
▪ Else: 3°C~10°C
Installer reference guide
56
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
b
Leaving water temperature: Modulation
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. When using the
room thermostat functionality, the customer needs to set the desired
room temperature. The unit will supply hot water to the heat emitters
and the room will be heated. Additionally, also the desired leaving
water temperature must be configured: when turning on the
modulation, the desired leaving water temperature will be calculated
automatically by the unit (based on the preset temperatures, if
weather-dependent is selected, modulation will be done based on
the desired weather-dependent temperatures); when turning off the
modulation, you can set the desired leaving water temperature on
the user interface. Moreover, with the modulation turned on, the
desired leaving water temperature is lowered or raised in function of
the desired room temperature and the difference between the actual
and the desired room temperature. This results in:
▪ stable room temperatures exactly
temperature (higher comfort level)
matching
the
desired
▪ less on/off cycles (lower noise level, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
▪ water temperatures as low as possible to match the desired
temperature (higher efficiency)
#
Code
[2.C.1]
[8‑05]
The following is only applicable in case of 2 leaving water
temperature zones. In case of 1 leaving water temperature zone,
connect the shut-off valve to the heating/cooling output.
The shut off valve for the main leaving water temperature zone can
close under these circumstances:
INFORMATION
During defrost operation, the shut-off valve is ALWAYS
opened.
During thermo: If [F‑0B] is enabled, the shut off valve closes when
there is no heating demand from the main zone. Enable this setting
to:
▪ avoid leaving water supply to the heat emitters in the main LWT
zone (through the mixing valve station) when there is request from
the additional LWT zone.
▪ activate the ON/OFF pump of the mixing valve station ONLY when
there is demand.
Description
#
▪ 1 Yes: Enabled, the leaving water
temperature is calculated according to
the difference between the desired
and the actual room temperature. This
creates a better match between the
capacity of the heat pump and the
actual required capacity, and results in
less start/stop cycles and a more
economic operation.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature can only be read out on
the user interface.
[8‑06]
Shut off valve
Modulation:
▪ 0 No: Disabled, the desired leaving
water temperature needs to be set on
the user interface.
[2.C.2]
Minimum leaving water temperature setpoint required to
reach a stable condition on the comfort setpoint for the
room.
Max modulation:
▪ 0°C~10°C
This is the temperature value by which
the desired leaving water temperature is
increased or decreased.
Code
[2.D.1]
[F-0B]
▪ 0 No: is NOT influenced by heating
demand.
▪ 1 Yes: closes when there is NO
heating demand.
INFORMATION
The setting [F‑0B] is only valid when there is a thermostat
or external room thermostat request setting (NOT in case
of leaving water temperature setting).
8.4.4
Additional zone
Setpoint screen
You can set the leaving water temperature for the additional zone
using the setpoint screen. For more information about how to do this,
see "8.3.5 Setpoint screen" on page 51.
Schedule
Indicates if the desired leaving water temperature is according to a
schedule. Also see "8.4.3 Main zone" on page 54.
INFORMATION
#
When leaving water temperature modulation is enabled,
the weather‑dependent curve needs to be set to a higher
position than [8-06] plus the minimum leaving water
temperature setpoint required to reach a stable condition
on the comfort setpoint for the room. To increase
efficiency, modulation can lower the leaving water setpoint.
By setting the weather‑dependent curve to a higher
position, it cannot drop below the minimum setpoint. Refer
to the illustration below.
Tt
Description
The shut off valve:
[3.1]
Code
N/A
Description
Schedule
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes
Heating schedule
You can set the additional zone heating temperature schedule using
the schedule screen. For more information about this screen, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen: Example" on page 51.
Setpoint mode
+[8-06]
The setpoint mode of the additional zone can be independently set
from the setpoint mode of the main zone, see " Main zone" on
page 54.
−[8-06]
a
b
Ta
a
Weather-dependent curve
#
[3.4]
Code
N/A
Description
Setpoint mode
▪ 0: Fixed
▪ 1: WD heating, fixed cooling
▪ 2: Weather dependent
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
57
8 Configuration
Heating WD curve
#
Set weather-dependent heating for the additional zone (if [3.4] = 1 or
2):
#
[3.5]
Code
[0-00]
[0-01]
Description
Set weather-dependent heating:
Tt
Code
[3.8.1]
[9-05]
Heating minimum: 15°C~37°C
[3.8.2]
[9-06]
Heating maximum
▪ [2‑0D]=2 (emitter type additional zone
= radiator)
37°C~65°C
[0-02]
[0-03]
Description
Leaving water temperature range for the additional leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
highest leaving water temperature in heating operation)
[0-01]
▪ Else: 37°C~55°C
[0-00]
Control
[0-03]
[0-02]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional zone)
The control type is displayed here, but cannot be adjusted. It is
determined by the control type of the main zone. For more info about
the functionality, see "8.4.3 Main zone" on page 54.
#
[3.9]
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
Code
N/A
▪ [0-03]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. –40°C~+5°C
ambient
▪ Leaving water if the control type of the
main zone is Leaving water.
▪ [0-02]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
ambient
▪ External room thermostat if the control
type of the main zone is External room
thermostat or Room thermostat.
▪ [0-01]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or drops below the
low
ambient
temperature.
[9‑05]°C~[9‑06]°C
Note: This value should be higher
than [0‑00] as for low outdoor
temperatures
warmer
water
is
required.
▪ [0-00]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature
when
the
outdoor
temperature equals or rises above the
high
ambient
temperature.
[9‑05]~min(45, [9‑06])°C
Note: This value should be lower than
[0‑01]
as
for
high
outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
Thermostat type
Only applicable in external room thermostat control. For more info
about the functionality, see "8.4.3 Main zone" on page 54.
#
[3.A]
Emitter type
Code
[C‑06]
▪ 2: 2 contacts. Connected to 2 digital
inputs (X2M/34a and X2M/35a)
Leaving water temperature: Delta T
For more information, see "8.4.3 Main zone" on page 54.
#
Code
[1-0C]
For more info about this functionality, see "8.4.3 Main zone" on
page 54.
[3.7]
Code
[2‑0D]
Description
External room thermostat type for the
additional zone:
▪ 1: 1 contact. Connected to only 1
digital input (X2M/35a)
[3.B.1]
#
Description
Control
Description
Delta T heating: A minimum temperature
difference is required for the good
operation of heat emitters in heating
mode.
▪ If [2-0C] = 2, this is fixed to 10°C
Description
▪ Else: 3°C~10°C
Emitter type
▪ 0: Underfloor heating
8.4.5
▪ 1: Fancoil unit
About space operation modes
▪ 2: Radiator
The setting of the emitter type has an influence on the space heating
setpoint range and the target delta T in heating as follows:
Emitter type
Additional zone
Space heating
setpoint range
[9‑05]~[9‑06]
Target delta T in
heating [1‑0C]
0: Underfloor heating Maximum 55°C
Variable (see [2.B])
1: Fancoil unit
Maximum 55°C
Variable (see [2.B])
2: Radiator
Maximum 65°C
Fixed 10°C
Setpoint range
For more information about this setting, also see "8.4.3 Main
zone" on page 54.
Installer reference guide
58
Space heating
This unit is a heating only model. The system can heat up a space,
but NOT cool down a space.
Operation range
Depending on the average outdoor temperature, the operation of the
unit in space heating is prohibited.
#
[4.3.1]
Code
[4-02]
Description
Space heating off temperature: When the
averaged outdoor temperature rises
above this value, space heating is turned
off.
▪ 14°C~35°C
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Number of zones
#
The system can supply leaving water to up to 2 water temperature
zones. During configuration, the number of water zones must be set.
#
[4.4]
Code
[7‑02]
[4.5]
Code
[F–0D]
Description
Pump operation mode:
▪ 0 Continuous: Continuous pump
operation, regardless of thermo ON or
OFF condition. Remark: Continuous
pump operation requires more energy
than sample or request pump
operation.
a
b
c
Description
▪ 0: Single zone
Only one leaving water temperature
zone:
b
c
d
▪ a: Space heating control
▪ b: Off
a
▪ c: On
▪ d: Pump operation
▪ a: Main LWT zone
[4.4]
[7‑02]
▪ 1: Dual zone
Two leaving water temperature zones.
The main leaving water temperature
zone consists of the higher load heat
emitters and a mixing station to
achieve the desired leaving water
temperature. In heating:
[4.5]
[F-0D]
a
▪ 1 Sample: The pump is ON when
there is heating demand as the leaving
water temperature has not yet reached
the desired temperature yet. When
thermo OFF condition occurs, the
pump runs every 3 minutes to check
the water temperature and demand
heating if necessary. Remark: Sample
is ONLY available in leaving water
temperature control.
a
c
b
e
d
g
b
▪ b: Off
▪ a: Additional LWT zone: Highest
temperature
zone:
c
▪ a: Space heating control
b
▪ b: Main LWT
temperature
▪ c: On
▪ d: LWT temperature
Lowest
▪ e: Actual
CAUTION
▪ f: Desired
If there are 2 zones, it is important that the zone with the
lowest water temperature is configured as the main zone,
and the zone with the highest water temperature is
configured as the additional zone. Not configuring the
system in this way could cause damage to the heat
emitters.
▪ g: Pump operation
CAUTION
If there are 2 zones and the emitter types are wrongly
configured, water of high temperature can be sent towards
a low temperature emitter (underfloor heating). To avoid
this:
▪ Install an aquastat/thermostatic valve to avoid too high
temperatures towards a low temperature emitter.
▪ Make sure you set the emitter types for the main zone
[2.7] and for the additional zone [3.7] correctly in
accordance with the connected emitter.
Pump operation mode
When the space heating operation is OFF, the pump is always OFF.
When space heating operation is ON, you have the choice between
these operation modes:
[4.5]
[F-0D]
▪ 2 Request: Pump operation based on
request. Example:
Using a room
thermostat and thermostat creates
thermo ON/OFF condition. Remark:
NOT available in leaving water
temperature control.
a
b
c
d
e
b
c
b
c
▪ a: Space heating control
▪ b: Off
▪ c: On
▪ d: Heating demand (by external
room
thermostat
or
room
thermostat)
▪ e: Pump operation
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
f
Installer reference guide
59
8 Configuration
[9-0D]=8
Unit type
In this part of the menu it can be read out which type of unit is used:
#
[4.6]
Code
N/A
a (kPa)
Description
Unit type:
▪ 1 Cooling only
▪ 2 Heating only
▪ 3 Reversible
Pump limitation
Pump speed limitation [9‑0D] defines the maximum pump speed. In
normal conditions, the default setting should NOT be modified. The
pump speed limitation will be overruled when the flow rate is in the
range of the minimum flow (error 7H).
#
[4.7]
Code
[9-0D]
Pump limitation:
▪ 0: No limitation
▪ 1~4: General limitation. There is
limitation in all conditions. The
required delta T control and comfort
are NOT guaranteed.
▪ 5~8: Limitation when no actuators.
When there is no heating output, the
pump speed limitation is applicable.
When there is heating output, the
pump speed is only determined by
delta T in relation to the required
capacity. With this limitation range,
delta T is possible and the comfort is
guaranteed.
The maximum values depend on the unit type:
[9-0D]=5
a (kPa)
a (kPa)
External static pressure
Water flow rate
Pump outside range
Description
[9-0D]=0
b (l/min)
a
b
When the pump operation function is disabled the pump will stop if
the outdoor temperature is higher than the value set by the Space
heating off temperature [4‑02]. When the pump operation is enabled,
the pump operation is possible at all outdoor temperatures.
#
Code
[4.9]
Description
[F-00]
Pump operation:
▪ 0: Disabled if outdoor temperature is
higher than [4‑02].
▪ 1:
Possible
temperatures.
In heating operation, the desired leaving water temperature is locally
increased around an outdoor temperature of 0°C.This compensation
can be selected when using an absolute or a weather dependent
desired temperature (see illustration below).
Tt
L
R
R
0°C
TA
0°C
a
#
b (l/min)
[9-0D]=7
a (kPa)
[4.A]
TA
b
a
b
[9-0D]=6
outdoor
Use this setting to compensate for possible heat losses of the
building due to the evaporation of melted ice or snow. (e.g. in cold
region countries).
L
a (kPa)
all
Increase around 0°C
Tt
b (l/min)
at
Absolute desired LWT
Weather dependent desired LWT
Code
[D-03]
Description
Increase around 0°C
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
▪ 2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
▪ 3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
▪ 4: increase 4°C, span 8°C
Overshoot
b (l/min)
b (l/min)
This function defines how much the water temperature may rise
above the desired leaving water temperature before the compressor
stops. The compressor will start up again when the leaving water
temperature drops below the desired leaving water temperature.
This function is ONLY applicable in heating mode.
#
[4.B]
Code
[9-04]
Description
Overshoot
▪ 1°C~4°C
Installer reference guide
60
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Antifrost
Reheat setpoint
Room frost protection [1.4] prevents the room from getting too cold.
For more information about room frost protection, see
"8.4.2 Room" on page 53.
Desired reheat tank temperature, used:
8.4.6
Tank
Tank setpoint screen
You can set the domestic hot water temperature using the setpoint
screen. For more information about how to do this, see
"8.3.5 Setpoint screen" on page 51.
▪ in Schedule + reheat mode, during reheat mode: the guaranteed
minimum tank temperature is set by the Reheat setpoint minus the
reheat hysteresis. If the tank temperature drops below this value,
the tank is heated up.
▪ during storage comfort, to prioritize the domestic hot water
preparation. When the tank temperature rises above this value,
domestic hot water preparation and space heating/cooling are
executed sequentially.
#
Powerful operation
You can use powerful operation to immediately start heating up the
water to the preset value (Storage comfort). However, this consumes
extra energy. If powerful operation is active,
the home screen.
will be shown on
To activate powerful operation
Activate or deactivate Powerful operation as follows:
Code
[5.4]
[6-0C]
Description
Reheat setpoint
▪ 30°C~min(50,[6‑0E]°C
Schedule
You can set the tank temperature schedule using the schedule
screen. For more information about this screen, see "8.3.8 Schedule
screen: Example" on page 51.
1 Go to [5.1]: Tank > Powerful operation
Heat up mode
2 Turn powerful operation Off or On.
The domestic hot water can be prepared in 3 different ways. They
differ from each other by the way the desired tank temperature is set
and how the unit acts upon it.
Usage example: You immediately need more hot water
If you are in the following situation:
#
▪ You already consumed most of your hot water.
Code
[5.6]
[6-0D]
Description
Heat up mode
▪ You cannot wait for the next scheduled action to heat up the DHW
tank.
▪ 0: Reheat only: Only reheat operation
is allowed.
Then you can activate DHW powerful operation.
▪ 1: Schedule + reheat: The domestic
hot water tank is heated according to a
schedule and between the scheduled
heat up cycles, reheat operation is
allowed.
Advantage: The DHW tank immediately starts heating up the water
to the preset value (Storage comfort).
INFORMATION
When powerful operation is active, the risk of space
heating and capacity shortage comfort problems is
significant. In case of frequent domestic hot water
operation, frequent and long space heating interruptions
will happen.
▪ 2: Schedule only: The domestic hot
water tank can ONLY be heated
according to a schedule.
See the operation manual for more details.
Comfort setpoint
Disinfection
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is Schedule
only or Schedule + reheat. When programming the schedule, you
can make use of the comfort setpoint as a preset value. When you
later want to change the storage setpoint, you only have to do it in
one place.
Applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank.
The tank will heat up until the storage comfort temperature has
been reached. It is the higher desired temperature when a storage
comfort action is scheduled.
Additionally, a storage stop can be programmed. This feature puts a
stop to tank heating even if the setpoint has NOT been reached.
Only program a storage stop when tank heating is absolutely
undesirable.
#
[5.2]
Code
[6-0A]
Description
The disinfection function disinfects the domestic hot water tank by
periodically heating the domestic hot water to a specific temperature.
CAUTION
The disinfection function settings MUST be configured by
the installer according to the applicable legislation.
#
[5.7.1]
Code
[2‑01]
Description
Activation
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes
[5.7.2]
[2‑00]
Operation day
Comfort setpoint
▪ 0: Every day
▪ 30°C~[6‑0E]°C
▪ 1: Monday
Eco setpoint
▪ 2: Tuesday
The storage economic temperature denotes the lower desired
tank temperature. It is the desired temperature when a storage
economic action is scheduled (preferably during day).
▪ 3: Wednesday
▪ 4: Thursday
▪ 5: Friday
#
[5.3]
Code
[6-0B]
Description
▪ 6: Saturday
Eco setpoint
▪ 30°C~min(50,[6‑0E])°C
▪ 7: Sunday
[5.7.3]
[2‑02]
Start time
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
61
8 Configuration
#
Code
[5.7.4]
[2‑03]
Description
INFORMATION
Tank setpoint
Disinfection function is restarted in case the domestic hot
water temperature drops 5°C below the disinfection target
temperature within the duration time.
55°C~75°C
[5.7.5]
[2‑04]
Duration
INFORMATION
5~60 minutes
An AH error occurs if you turn off domestic hot water
operation during disinfection.
TDHW
[2-03]
[2-04]
Maximum DHW temperature setpoint
TH
The maximum temperature that users can select for the domestic
hot water. You can use this setting to limit the temperatures at the
hot water taps.
TU
INFORMATION
00.00
01.00
22.00
23.00
24.00
During disinfection of the domestic hot water tank, the
DHW temperature can exceed this maximum temperature.
t
INFORMATION
[2-02]
TDHW
TU
TH
t
Limit the maximum hot water temperature according to the
applicable legislation.
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature
High set point temperature [2-03]
Time
#
[5.8]
WARNING
Code
[6-0E]
CAUTION
Be sure that the disinfection function start time [5.7.3] with
defined duration [5.7.5] is NOT interrupted by possible
domestic hot water demand.
BSH allowance schedule [9.4.2] is used to restrict or allow
anti-legionella heater operation based on a weekly
program. Advice: In order to avoid unsuccessful
disinfection function, at least allow the anti-legionella
heater (by the weekly program) for minimum 4 hours
starting from the scheduled start-up of disinfection. If the
anti-legionella heater is restricted during disinfection, this
function will NOT be successful and the applicable warning
AH will be generated.
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
62
The maximum temperature is NOT
applicable during disinfection function.
See disinfection function.
Hysteresis
The following ON hysteresis can be set.
Heat pump ON hysteresis
Applicable when domestic hot water preparation is reheat only.
When the tank temperature drops below the reheat temperature
minus the heat pump ON hysteresis temperature, the tank heats up
to the reheat temperature.
The minimum ON temperature is 20°C, even if setpoint hysteresis is
smaller than 20°C.
CAUTION
Installer reference guide
Maximum
The maximum temperature that users
can select for the domestic hot water.
You can use this setting to limit the
temperature at the hot water taps.
Be aware that the domestic hot water temperature at the
hot water tap will be equal to the value selected in field
setting [2-03] after a disinfection operation.
When the high domestic hot water temperature can be a
potential risk for human injuries, a mixing valve (field
supply) shall be installed at the hot water outlet connection
of the domestic hot water tank. This mixing valve shall
secure that the hot water temperature at the hot water tap
never rise above a set maximum value. This maximum
allowable hot water temperature shall be selected
according to the applicable legislation.
Description
#
[5.9]
Code
[6-00]
Description
Heat pump ON hysteresis
▪ 2°C~40°C
Reheat hysteresis
Applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled
+reheat. When the tank temperature drops below the reheat
temperature minus the reheat hysteresis temperature, the tank heats
up to the reheat temperature.
#
[5.A]
Code
[6-08]
Description
Reheat hysteresis
▪ 2°C~20°C
Setpoint mode
#
[5.B]
Code
N/A
Description
Setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed
▪ Weather dependent
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
TDHW
WD curve
When weather dependent operation is active the desired tank
temperature is determined automatically depending on the averaged
outdoor temperature: low outdoor temperatures will result in higher
desired tank temperatures as the cold water tap is colder and vice
versa.
TU=TBUH OFF 60
THP MAX 50
THP OFF 48
In case of Schedule only or Schedule + reheat domestic hot water
preparation, the storage comfort temperature is weather dependent
(according to the weather dependent curve), the storage economic
and reheat temperature are NOT weather dependent.
30
40
20
[5.C]
Code
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
[0-0C]
TU
= 60°C
THP MAX = 50°C
[6-01] = 2°C
[6-00] = 2°C
HP
t
BUH
HP
TBUH OFF
THP MAX
Weather-dependent curve
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
TDHW
[0-0C]
Backup heater
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the backup heater can take place
Backup heater OFF temperature (TU)
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
Example: setpoint (TU)≤maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
[0-0B]
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
Ta
▪ TDHW: The desired tank temperature.
TDHW
THP MAX 50
TU=THP OFF 45
THP ON 43
▪ Ta: The (averaged) outdoor ambient
temperature
40
▪ [0-0E]:
low
outdoor
temperature: -40°C‑5°C
ambient
20
▪ [0-0D]:
high
outdoor
temperature: 10°C‑25°C
ambient
[6-00]
30
HP
10
5
▪ [0-0C]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
drops below the low ambient
temperature: 45°C~[6‑0E]°C
t
HP
THP MAX
▪ [0-0B]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
rises above the high ambient
temperature: 35°C~[6‑0E]°C
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
Margin
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the anti‑legionella heater can take
place
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
INFORMATION
In domestic hot water operation, the following hysteresis value can
be set for the heat pump operation:
#
BUH
5
Description
[0-0B]
[5.D]
HP
10
In case of Reheat only domestic hot water preparation, the desired
tank temperature is weather dependent (according to the weather
dependent curve). During weather dependent operation, the enduser cannot adjust the desired tank temperature on the user
interface. Also see "8.3.7 Detailed screen with weather-dependent
curve" on page 51.
#
[6-01]
[6-00]
THP ON 46
Code
[6-01]
The maximum heat pump temperature depends on the
ambient temperature. For more information, see the
operation range.
Description
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump OFF temperature.
Range: 0°C~10°C
8.4.7
User settings
Language
Example: setpoint (TU)>maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
#
[7.1]
Code
N/A
Description
Language
Time/date
#
[7.2]
Code
N/A
Description
Set the local time and date
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
63
8 Configuration
INFORMATION
If you want to…
By default, daylight savings time is enabled and clock
format is set to 24 hours. If you want to change these
settings, you can do this in the menu structure (User
settings > Time/date) once the unit is initialised.
Holiday
About holiday mode
During your holiday, you can use the holiday mode to deviate from
your normal schedules without having to change them. While holiday
mode is active, space heating operation and domestic hot water
operation will be turned off. Room frost protection and anti-legionella
operation will remain active.
Typical workflow
Then…
Manually activate a quiet Select the applicable quiet
mode level
mode level. Example: Most
quiet.
Use and program a quiet Select Automatic.
mode schedule
Go to [7.4.2] Schedule and
program the schedule. For
more information about
scheduling, see
"8.3.8 Schedule screen:
Example" on page 51.
Usage example: Baby is sleeping in the afternoon
If you are in the following situation:
▪ You have programmed a quiet mode schedule:
Using holiday mode typically consists of the following stages:
▪ During the night: Most quiet.
1
2
▪ During the day: Off to ensure the heating capacity of the
system.
Setting the starting date and ending date of your holiday.
Activating the holiday mode.
To check if holiday mode is activated and/or running
▪ However, during the afternoon the baby is sleeping and you want
it to be quiet.
is activated on the home screen, holiday mode is active.
If
Then you can do the following:
To configure the holiday
1 Go to [7.4.1]: User settings > Quiet > Activation.
1 Activate the holiday mode.
—
2 Select Most quiet.
▪ Go to [7.3.1]: User settings > Holiday > Activation.
Advantage:
▪ Select On.
2 Set the first day of your holiday.
—
▪ Go to [7.3.2]: From.
The outdoor unit runs in its most quiet level.
Electricity prices and gas price
▪ Select a date.
Only applicable in combination with the bivalent function. See also
"Bivalent" on page 71.
▪ Confirm the changes.
#
3 Set the last day of your holiday.
—
▪ Go to [7.3.3]: Till.
▪ Select a date.
Code
Description
[7.5.1]
N/A
Electricity price > High
[7.5.2]
N/A
Electricity price > Medium
[7.5.3]
N/A
Electricity price > Low
[7.6]
N/A
Gas price
▪ Confirm the changes.
INFORMATION
Quiet
About quiet mode
You can use quiet mode to decrease the sound of the outdoor unit.
However, this also decreases the heating capacity of the system.
There are multiple quiet mode levels.
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON
([9.C.1] or [C-02]). These values can only be set in menu
structure [7.5.1], [7.5.2] and [7.5.3]. Do NOT use overview
settings.
To set the gas price
You can:
1 Go to [7.6]: User settings > Gas price.
▪ Completely deactivate quiet mode
2 Select the correct gas price.
▪ Manually activate a quiet mode level until the next scheduled
action
3 Confirm the changes.
INFORMATION
▪ Use and program a quiet mode schedule
Price value ranging from 0.00~990 valuta/kWh (with 2
significant values).
To check if quiet mode is active
is displayed on the home screen, quiet mode is active.
If
To set the electricity price
To use quiet mode
1 Go to [7.5.1]/[7.5.2]/[7.5.3]: User settings > Electricity
price > High/Medium/Low.
1 Go to [7.4.1]: User settings > Quiet > Activation.
2 Do one of the following:
—
2 Select the correct electricity price.
3 Confirm the changes.
If you want to…
Completely deactivate
quiet mode
Then…
4 Repeat this for all three electricity prices.
—
Select Off.
INFORMATION
Price value ranging from 0.00~990 valuta/kWh (with 2
significant values).
Installer reference guide
64
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
INFORMATION
8.4.8
If no schedule is set, the Electricity price for High is taken
into account.
Information
Dealer information
The installer can fill in his contact number here.
To set the electricity price schedule timer
#
1 Go to [7.5.4]: User settings > Electricity price >
Schedule.
2 Program the selection using the scheduling screen.
You can set the High, Medium and Low electricity
prices according to your electricity supplier.
Code
[8.3]
—
3 Confirm the changes.
N/A
Description
Number that users can call in case of
problems.
Possible read-out information
In menu…
You can read out…
[8.1] Energy data
Produced energy, consumed
electricity, and consumed gas
[8.2] Malfunction history
Malfunction history
[8.3] Dealer information
Contact/helpdesk number
[8.4] Sensors
Room, tank or domestic hot
water, outside, and leaving water
temperature (if applicable)
[8.5] Actuators
Status/mode of each actuator
INFORMATION
The values correspond with the electricity price values for
High, Medium and Low previously set. If no schedule is
set, the electricity price for High is taken into account.
About energy prices in case of an incentive per kWh renewable
energy
An incentive can be taken into account when setting the energy
prices. Although the running cost can increase, the total operation
cost, taking into account the reimbursement will be optimized.
Example: Domestic hot water
pump ON/OFF
[8.6] Operation modes
Current operation mode
NOTICE
Make sure to modify the setting of the energy prices at the
end of the incentive period.
To set the gas price in case of an incentive per kWh renewable
energy
Example: Defrost/oil return
mode
[8.7] About
Version information about the
system
[8.8] Connection status
Information about the connection
status of the unit, the room
thermostat and the LAN adapter.
Calculate the value for the gas price with the following formula:
▪ Actual gas price+(Incentive/kWh×0.9)
For the procedure to set the gas price, see "To set the gas price" on
page 64.
To set the electricity price in case of an incentive per kWh
renewable energy
Calculate the value for the electricity price with following formula:
▪ Actual electricity price+Incentive/kWh
For the procedure to set the electricity price, see "To set the
electricity price" on page 64.
Example
This is an example and the prices and/or values used in this
example are NOT accurate.
8.4.9
Installer settings
Configuration wizard
After first power ON of the system, the user interface will guide you
using the configuration wizard. This way you can set the most
important initial settings. This way the unit will be able to run
properly. Afterwards, more detailed settings can be done via the
menu structure if required.
To restart the configuration wizard, go to Installer settings >
Configuration wizard [9.1].
Domestic hot water
Domestic hot water
Data
Price/kWh
Gas price
4.08
Electricity price
12.49
Renewable heat incentive per
kWh
5
The following setting determines if the system can prepare domestic
hot water or not, and which tank is used. This setting is read only.
#
Code
[9.2.1]
[E‑05]
(*)
[E‑06](*)
Calculation of the gas price:
(*)
Gas price=4.08+(5×0.9)
Calculation of the electricity price:
▪ Integrated
The anti-legionella heater will also be
used during disinfection.
[E‑07](*)
Gas price=Actual gas price+(Incentive/kWh×0.9)
Gas price=8.58
Description
[E-05]
[E-06]
[E-07]
Menu structure setting [9.2.1] replaces the following 3
overview settings:
Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
Is a domestic hot water tank installed in the system?
What kind of domestic hot water tank is installed?
Electricity price=Actual electricity price+Incentive/kWh
Electricity price=12.49+5
Electricity price=17.49
Price
Value in breadcrumb
Gas: 4.08 /kWh
[7.6]=8.6
Electricity: 12.49 /kWh
[7.5.1]=17
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
65
8 Configuration
DHW pump
#
#
Code
[9.2.2]
[D‑02]
Code
[9.3.2]
Description
[5‑0D]
DHW pump:
▪ 1: 230V, 3ph
▪ 0: No DHW pump: NOT installed
▪ 2: 400V, 3ph
▪ 1: Instant hot water: Installed for
instant hot water when water is
tapped. The user sets the operation
timing of the domestic hot water pump
using the schedule. Control of this
pump is possible with the user
interface.
▪ 2:
Disinfection
:
Installed
for
disinfection. It runs when the
disinfection function of the domestic
hot water tank is running. No further
settings are needed.
Configuration
The backup heater can be configured in different ways. It can be
chosen to have a 1-step only backup heater or a backup heater with
2 steps. If 2 steps, the capacity of the second step depends on this
setting. It can also be chosen to have a higher capacity of the
second step in emergency.
#
Code
[9.3.3]
[4‑0A]
▪ 2: Relay 1 / Relay 2(a)
▪ 3: Relay 1 / Relay 2 Emergency Relay
1+2(a)
Domestic hot water pump installed for…
Instant hot water
(a)
Not available for 3V models.
Disinfection
c
a
f
b
Description
▪ 0: Relay 1
▪ 1: Relay 1 / Relay 1+2(a)
See also illustrations below.
a
Description
▪ 0: 230V, 1ph
b
g
INFORMATION
c
d
f
e
g
Settings [9.3.3] and [9.3.5] are linked. Changing one
setting influences the other. If you change one, check if the
other is still as expected.
INFORMATION
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Indoor unit
Tank
Domestic hot water pump
Heater element
Non‑return valve
Shower
Cold water
During normal operation, the capacity of the second step of
the backup heater at nominal voltage is equal to
[6‑03]+[6‑04].
INFORMATION
If [4‑0A]=3 and emergency mode is active, the power
usage of the backup heater is maximal and equal to
2×[6‑03]+[6‑04].
DHW pump schedule
Here you can program a schedule for the DHW pump (only for field
supplied domestic hot water pump for secondary return).
INFORMATION
Program a domestic hot water pump schedule to determine when
to turn on and off the pump.
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If
the storage temperature set point is higher than 50°C,
Daikin recommends NOT to disable the backup heater
second step because it will have a big impact on the
required time for the unit to heat up the domestic hot water
tank.
When turned on, the pump runs and makes sure hot water is
instantly available at the tap. To save energy, only turn on the pump
during periods of the day when instant hot water is necessary.
Backup heater
Besides the type of backup heater, the voltage, configuration and
capacity must be set on the user interface.
The capacities for the different steps of the backup heater must be
set for the energy metering and/or power consumption feature to
work properly. When measuring the resistance value of each heater,
you can set the exact heater capacity and this will lead to more
accurate energy data.
Capacity step 1
#
[9.3.4]
[9.3.5]
Code
[6‑04]
The backup heater is adapted to be connected to most common
European electricity grids. The type of backup heater must be set on
the user interface. For units with a built-in backup heater, the type of
heater can be viewed but not changed.
#
[9.3.1]
Code
[E‑03]
Description
▪ 0: No heater
▪ 1: External heater
▪ 4: 9W
Voltage
The optional external BUH can be set to 230V, 1ph, 230V, 3ph or
400V, 3ph.
Installer reference guide
66
Description
▪ The capacity of the first step of the
backup heater at nominal voltage.
Additional capacity step 2
#
Backup heater type
Code
[6‑03]
Description
▪ The capacity difference between the
second and first step of the backup
heater at nominal voltage. Nominal
value depends on backup heater
configuration.
Equilibrium
#
[9.3.6]
Code
[5-00]
Description
Equilibrium: Is backup heater operation
allowed above equilibrium temperature
during space heating operation?
▪ 1: NOT allowed
▪ 0: Allowed
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
#
Code
[9.3.7]
[5-01]
BSH eco timer
Description
Equilibrium temperature: Outdoor
temperature below which operation of
the backup heater is allowed.
#
[9.4.3]
Code
[8-03]
Operation
Code
[9.3.8]
[4‑00]
▪ When domestic hot water mode is
NOT active, the delay time is
20 minutes.
Description
Backup heater operation:
▪ 0: Restricted
▪ The delay time starts from antilegionella heater ON temperature.
▪ 1: Allowed
▪ By adapting the anti-legionella heater
delay time versus the maximum
running time, you can find an optimal
balance between the energy efficiency
and the heat up time.
▪ 2: Only DHW Enabled for domestic hot
water, disable for space heating
INFORMATION
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If
backup heater operation during space heating needs to be
limited but can be allowed for domestic hot water
operation, then set [4‑00] to 2.
▪ If the anti-legionella heater delay time
is set too high, it might take a long
time before the domestic hot water
reaches its set temperature.
Anti-legionella heater
▪ The setting [8‑03] is only meaningful if
setting [4‑03]=1. Setting [4‑03]=0/2/3/4
limits
the
anti-legionella
heater
automatically in relation to heat pump
operation time in domestic water
heating mode.
Capacity
The capacity of the anti-legionella heater must be set for the energy
metering and/or power consumption control feature to work properly.
When measuring the resistance value of the anti-legionella heater,
you can set the exact heater capacity and this will lead to more
accurate energy data.
#
[9.4.1]
Code
[6‑02]
Anti-legionella heater delay timer.
Start-up delay time for the anti-legionella
heater when domestic hot water mode is
active.
Range: ‑15°C~35°C
#
Description
▪ Make sure that [8‑03] is always in
relation with the maximum running
time [8‑01].
Description
Range: 20~95 minutes
Capacity [kW]. Only applies to domestic
hot water tank with an internal antilegionella heater. The capacity of the
anti-legionella heater at nominal voltage.
Operation
Range: 0~10 kW
[9.4.4]
[4-03]
Defines the operation permission of the
anti-legionella heater depending on
ambient, domestic hot water temperature
or operation mode of heat pump. This
setting is only applicable in reheat mode
for applications with separate domestic
hot water tank. When setting
[4‑03]=1/2/3/4, the anti-legionella heater
operation can still be restricted by the
anti-legionella heater allowance
schedule.
[9.4.4]
[4-03]
▪ 0: Anti-legionella heater operation is
NOT allowed except for "Disinfection
function" and "Powerful domestic
water heating".
Only use this in case the heat pump
capacity can cover the heating
requirements of the house and
domestic hot water during the
complete heating season.
The anti-legionella heater will not be
allowed to operate when Ta<[5‑03] and
[5‑02]=1. The domestic hot water
temperature can be maximum the heat
pump OFF temperature.
[9.4.4]
[4-03]
▪ 1: Anti-legionella heater operation is
allowed when required.
#
Code
BSH allowance schedule
Program when the anti-legionella heater can operate.
schedule for the anti-legionella heater here using
screen. Two actions per day are allowed in a week
more information, see "8.3.8 Schedule screen:
page 51.
You can set a
the schedule
schedule. For
Example" on
Example: Only allow the anti-legionella heater to operate during the
night.
Description
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
67
8 Configuration
#
[9.4.4]
Code
[4-03]
Description
INFORMATION
▪ 2: The anti-legionella heater is allowed
outside the operation range of the heat
pump for domestic hot water
operation.
Anti-legionella heater operation is only
allowed if:
The auto emergency setting can be set in the menu
structure of the user interface only.
INFORMATION
If [4‑03]=1 or 3, then Emergency=Manual is not applicable
for the anti-legionella heater.
▪ Ambient temperature is out of the
operating range: Ta<[5‑03] or
Ta>35°C
INFORMATION
If a heat pump failure occurs and Emergency is set to
Manual, the room frost protection function, the underfloor
heating screed dryout function, and the water pipe
antifreeze function will remain active even if the user does
NOT confirm emergency operation.
The anti-legionella heater is only
allowed to operate when Ta<[5‑03] if
space heating priority is enabled
([5‑02]=1).
▪ Domestic hot water temperature is
2°C lower than the heat pump OFF
temperature.
If bivalent operation is enabled
([C‑02]=1) and permission signal for
auxiliary boiler is ON, the anti-legionella
heater will be restricted even when
Ta<[5‑03].
9.4.4
[4-03]
9.4.4
[4-03]
Balancing
Priorities
For systems with an integrated domestic hot water tank
#
[9.6.1]
Code
[5‑02]
▪ 3: The anti-legionella heater is allowed
when the heat pump is NOT active in
domestic hot water operation.
Same as setting 1, but simultaneous
heat pump domestic hot water
operation and anti-legionella heater
operation is not allowed.
▪ 4: Anti-legionella heater operation is
NOT allowed except for "Disinfection
function".
Only use this in case the capacity of
the heat pump can cover the heating
requirements of the house and
domestic hot water over the complete
heating season.
The anti-legionella heater will not be
allowed to operate when Ta<[5‑03] and
[5‑02]=1. The domestic hot water
temperature can be maximum the heat
pump OFF temperature.
Description
Space heating priority: Defines whether
backup heater will assist the heat pump
during domestic hot water operation.
Enable this function to shorten tank
heating operation time and interruption
of the space heating cycle.
This setting MUST always be 1.
[5‑01] Equilibrium temperature and
[5‑03] Space heating priority
temperature are related to backup
heater. So, you must set [5‑03] equal or
a few degrees higher than [5‑01].
If the backup heater operation is limited
([4‑00]=0) and the outdoor temperature
is lower than setting [5‑03], the
domestic hot water will not be heated
with the backup heater.
[9.6.2]
[5‑03]
[9.6.3]
[5-04]
Emergency
Priority temperature: Defines the
outdoor temperature which below the
domestic hot water will be heated by
anti-legionella heater only.
Range: –15°C~35°C
▪ When auto emergency is set to Manual and a heat pump failure
occurs, the domestic hot water and space heating operation will
stop and need to be recovered manually via the user interface. To
recover operation manually, go to the Malfunctioning main menu
screen, where the user interface will then ask you to confirm
whether the optional backup heater or anti-legionella heater can
take over the heat load or not.
Offset BSH setpoint: Set point
correction for domestic hot water
temperature: set point correction for the
desired domestic hot water
temperature, to be applied at low
outdoor temperature when space
heating priority is enabled. The
corrected (higher) set point will make
sure that the total heat capacity of the
water in the tank remains
approximately unchanged, by
compensating for the colder bottom
water layer of the tank (because the
heat exchanger coil is not operational)
with a warmer top layer.
Emergency
Range: 0°C~20°C
When the heat pump fails to operate, the optional backup heater and
anti-legionella heater can serve as an emergency heater and either
automatically or non-automatically take over the heat load.
▪ When auto emergency is set to Automatic and a heat pump failure
occurs, the optional backup heater will automatically take over the
heat load, and the anti-legionella heater will automatically take
over the domestic hot water production.
We recommend to set Emergency to Automatic if the house is
unattended for longer periods.
#
[9.5]
Code
N/A
Description
▪ 0: Manual
▪ 1: Automatic
Installer reference guide
68
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
Timers for simultaneous space and domestic hot water
operation request
#
Code
[9.6.4]
Description
[8-02]
Anti-recycle timer: Minimum time
between two cycles for domestic hot
water. The actual anti-recycling time also
depends on setting [8-04].
Water pipe freeze prevention
Only relevant for installations with water piping outdoors. This
function tries to protect outdoor water piping from freezing.
#
[9.7]
Code
[4-04]
▪ 0: Intermittent
Range: 0~10 hours
▪ 1: Continuous
Remark: The minimum time is 0.5 hours
even when the selected value is 0.
[9.6.5]
N/A
[9.6.6]
[8-01]
Description
Water pipe freeze prevention:
▪ 2: Off
Minimum running timer:
NOTICE
Do NOT change.
If the system does NOT contain a backup heater, then:
Maximum running timer for domestic hot
water operation. Domestic hot water
heating stops even when the target
domestic hot water temperature is NOT
reached. The actual maximum running
time also depends on setting [8-04].
▪ When Control=Room thermostat: This
preset value is only taken into account
if there is a request for space heating.
If there is NO request for space
heating, the tank is heated until the
setpoint has been reached.
▪ Make sure that the room antifrost control is activated
([2-06]=1).
▪ Do NOT change the default room antifrost temperature
[2-05].
▪ Make sure that the water pipe freeze prevention is
activated ([4-04]≠2).
Benefit kWh power supply
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/9+10) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
▪ When Control≠Room thermostat: This
preset value is always taken into
account.
Range: 5~95 minutes
[9.6.7]
[8-04]
Additional timer: Additional running time
for the maximum running time depending
on the outdoor temperature [4-02].
Range: 0~95 minutes
1
0
1
0
1
2
t
t
[8-02]
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
Time
[8-04]: Additional timer at [4-02]
t
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-02]
[5-03]
TA
t
[4-02]
[D-01]
Description
Connection to a Benefit kWh power
supply or a Safety thermostat
▪ 1 Open: The outdoor unit is connected
to a preferential kWh rate power
supply. When the preferential kWh
rate signal is sent by the electricity
company, the contact will open and
the unit will go in forced off mode.
When the signal is released again, the
voltage-free contact will close and the
unit will restart operation. Therefore,
always enable the auto restart
function.
▪ 2 Closed: The outdoor unit is
connected to a preferential kWh rate
power supply. When the preferential
kWh rate signal is sent by the
electricity company, the contact will
close and the unit will go in forced off
mode. When the signal is released
again, the voltage-free contact will
open and the unit will restart
operation. Therefore, always enable
the auto restart function.
▪ 3 Safety thermostat: A safety
thermostat is connected to the system
(normal closed contact)
[8-01]
0
[9.8.1]
Code
▪ 0 No: The outdoor unit is connected to
a normal power supply.
[8-02]: Anti-recycle timer
[8-01]
#
TA
Ambient (outdoor) temperature
Time
Anti-recycle timer
Maximum running time domestic hot water
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
69
8 Configuration
#
[9.8.2]
Code
[D-00]
Description
Allow heater: Which heaters are allowed
to operate during preferential kWh rate
power supply?
▪ 0 No: None
▪ 1 Only BSH: Anti-legionella heater
only
#
Limit 1: 0 A~50°A
[9.9.5]
[5-06]
Limit 2: 0 A~50°A
[9.9.6]
[5-07]
Limit 3: 0 A~50°A
[9.9.7]
[5-08]
Limit 4: 0 A~50°A
Limit when [9.9.1]=Continuous and [9.9.2]=kW:
#
[9.9.8]
Code
[5-09]
See table below.
Setting 2 is only meaningful if the
preferential kWh rate power supply is of
type 1 or indoor unit is connected to a
normal kWh rate power supply (via
X2M/5‑6) and the backup heater is NOT
connected to the preferential kWh rate
power supply.
[9.8.3]
[D-05]
Allow pump:
▪ 0 No: Pump is forced off
Anti-legionella
heater
Backup heater
0 kW~20 kW
Limits when [9.9.1]=Inputs and [9.9.2]=kW:
#
Code
Description
[9.9.9]
[5-09]
Limit 1: 0 kW~20°kW
[9.9.A]
[5-0A]
Limit 2: 0 kW~20°kW
[9.9.B]
[5-0B]
Limit 3: 0 kW~20°kW
[9.9.C]
[5-0C]
Limit 4: 0 kW~20°kW
#
Compressor
[9.9.D]
Forced OFF
Description
Limit: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
Priority heater
▪ 1 Yes: No limitation
[D‑00]
Description
[5-05]
▪ 2 Only BUH: Backup heater only
▪ 3 All: All heaters
Code
[9.9.4]
Code
[4-01]
Forced OFF
Description
Power consumption control
DISABLED [4‑08]=0
0
Forced OFF
1
Permitted
2
Forced OFF
3
Permitted
▪ 1 Booster heater: The booster heater
is prioritized.
Power consumption control
▪ 2 Backup heater: The backup heater
is prioritized.
▪ 0 None : Backup heater and booster
heater can operate simultaneously.
Permitted
Power consumption control
Power consumption control
ENABLED [4‑08]=1/2
See "5 Application guidelines" on page 10 for detailed information
about this functionality.
#
[9.9.1]
Code
[4-08]
▪ 0 None : Depending on the power
limitation level, the booster heater
will be limited first, before the backup
heater is limited.
Description
Power consumption control:
▪ 0 No: Disabled.
▪ 1 Booster heater: Depending on the
power limitation level, the backup
heater will be limited first, before the
booster heater is limited.
▪ 1 Continuous: Enabled: You can set
one power limitation value (in A or
kW) to which the system power
consumption will be limited for all the
time.
▪ 2 Inputs: Enabled: You can set up to
four different power limitation values
(in A or kW) to which the system
power consumption will be limited
when the corresponding digital input
asks.
[9.9.2]
[4-09]
Type:
▪ 0 Amp: The limitation values are set
in A.
▪ 1 kW: The limitation values are set in
kW.
Limit when [9.9.1]=Continuous and [9.9.2]=Amp:
#
[9.9.3]
Code
[5-05]
Description
70
Note: In case power consumption control is DISABLED (for all
models) the setting [4‑01] defines whether backup heater and
booster heater can operate simultaneously, or if the booster heater/
backup heater has priority over the backup heater/booster heater.
In case power consumption control is ENABLED, the setting [4‑01]
defines the priority of the electrical heaters depending on applicable
limitation.
INFORMATION
Anti-legionella heater. In the menu structure the term
"Booster heater" is used. However, this is actually an antilegionella heater.
Limit: Only applicable in case of full
time current limitation mode.
Energy metering
0 A~50 A
Energy metering
Limits when [9.9.1]=Inputs and [9.9.2]=Amp:
Installer reference guide
▪ 2 Backup heater: Depending on the
power limitation level, the booster
heater will be limited first, before the
backup heater is limited.
If energy metering is performed by the use of external power meters,
configure the settings as described below. Select the pulse
frequency output of each power meter in accordance with the power
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
meter specifications. It is possible to connect up to 2 power meters
with different pulse frequencies. If only 1 or no power meter is used,
select 'None' to indicate the corresponding pulse input is NOT used.
#
Code
[9.B.3]
Description
[1-0A]
Averaging time:
▪ 0: No averaging
#
[9.A.1]
Code
[D‑08]
Description
▪ 1: 12 hours
Electricity meter 1:
▪ 2: 24 hours
▪ 0 None: NOT installed
▪ 3: 48 hours
▪ 1 1/10kWh: Installed
▪ 4: 72 hours
▪ 2 1/kWh: Installed
[9.A.2]
[D‑09]
▪ 3 10/kWh : Installed
Bivalent
▪ 4 100/kWh: Installed
Bivalent
▪ 5 1000/kWh: Installed
Only applies to indoor unit installations with an auxiliary boiler
(alternating operation, connected in parallel). The purpose of
bivalent operation is to determine which heating source can/will
provide the space heating, either the indoor unit or an auxiliary
boiler.
Electricity meter 2:
▪ 0 None: NOT installed
▪ 1 1/10kWh: Installed
▪ 2 1/kWh: Installed
▪ 3 10/kWh : Installed
#
Code
[9.C.1]
Description
[C-02]
Bivalent: Indicates if the space heating is
also performed by means of another heat
source than the system.
▪ 4 100/kWh: Installed
▪ 5 1000/kWh: Installed
▪ 0 No: Not installed
Sensors
▪ 1 Yes: Installed. The auxiliary boiler
(gas boiler, oil burner) will operate
when the outdoor ambient temperature
is low. During bivalent operation, the
heat pump is turned off. Set this value
in case an auxiliary boiler is used.
External sensor
#
[9.B.1]
Code
[C–08]
Description
External sensor : When an optional
external ambient sensor is connected,
the type of the sensor must be set.
▪ 0 None : NOT installed. The thermistor
in the user interface and in the outdoor
unit are used for measurement.
▪ 1 Outdoor: Connected to PCB of the
indoor unit measuring the outdoor
temperature. Remark: For some
functionality, the temperature sensor
in the outdoor unit is still used.
▪ If Bivalent is enabled: When the outdoor temperature drops below
the bivalent ON temperature (fixed or variable based on energy
prices), the space heating by the indoor unit stops automatically
and the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is active.
▪ If Bivalent is disabled: Space heating is only done by the indoor
unit within the operation range. The permission signal for the
auxiliary boiler is always inactive.
INFORMATION
▪ The combination of setting [4‑03]=0/2 with bivalent
operation at low outdoor temperature can result in
domestic hot water shortage.
▪ 2 Room: Connected to PCB of the
indoor unit measuring the indoor
temperature. The temperature sensor
in the user interface is NOT used
anymore. Remark: This value has
only meaning in room thermostat
control.
▪ The bivalent operation function has no impact on the
domestic water heating mode. The domestic hot water
is still and only heated by the indoor unit.
▪ The permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is located
on the EKRP1HB (digital I/O PCB). When it is
activated, the contact X1, X2 is closed and open when
it is deactivated. See illustration below for the
schematic location of this contact.
Ext. amb. sensor offset
ONLY applicable in case an external outdoor ambient sensor is
connected and configured.
#
[9.B.2]
Code
[2-0B]
Description
Ext. amb. sensor offset: Offset on the
ambient temperature measured on the
external outdoor temperature sensor.
X1 X2 X3 X4
You can calibrate the external outdoor ambient temperature sensor.
It is possible to give an offset to the thermistor value. This setting
can be used to compensate for situations where the external outdoor
ambient sensor cannot be installed on the ideal installation location.
X2M
OFF ON
SS1
▪ –5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C
X1M
Averaging time
The average timer corrects the influence of ambient temperature
variations. The weather-dependent set point calculation is done on
the average outdoor temperature.
The outdoor temperature is averaged over the selected time period.
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
Boiler efficiency
Depending on the used boiler, this should be chosen as follows:
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
71
8 Configuration
#
Code
[9.C.2]
Description
[7‑05]
3°C
a
▪ 0: Very high
b
▪ 1: High
[C-03]
▪ 2: Medium
Tcalc
[C-03]+[C-04]
TA
Tcalc
▪ 3: Low
Outdoor temperature
Bivalent ON temperature (variable). Below this
temperature, the auxiliary boiler will always be ON. Tcalc can
never go below [C‑03] or above [C‑03]+[C‑04].
Auxiliary boiler active
Auxiliary boiler inactive
▪ 4:Very low
a
b
Possibility 1: Based on the outdoor temperature
Set all electricity prices ([7.5.1]~[7.5.3]) to "0" in the menu structure.
Also set the following values:
CAUTION
Make sure to observe all rules mentioned in application
guideline 5 when bivalent operation function is enabled.
NOTICE
Do NOT use overview settings!
#
Code
[9.C.3]
Daikin shall NOT be held liable for any damage resulting
from failure to observe this rule.
Description
[C-03]
[9.C.4]
Bivalent ON temperature: Defines the
outdoor temperature below which the
permission signal for the auxiliary boiler
is active (X1 and X2 on EKRP1HB is
closed) and space heating by indoor unit
is stopped.
[C-04]
Alarm output
Alarm output
#
[9.D]
Code
[C–09]
▪ 0 Abnormal: The alarm output will be
powered when an alarm occurs. By
setting this value, a distinction is made
between the detection of an alarm,
and the detection of a power failure.
a
[C-04]
b
▪ 1 Normal : The alarm output will NOT
be powered when an alarm occurs.
TA
[C-03]
Outdoor temperature
Bivalent ON temperature (fixed)
Auxiliary boiler active
Auxiliary boiler inactive
See also table below (Alarm output
logic).
Alarm output logic
Possibility 2: Based on the outdoor temperature and energy prices
[C-09]
Alarm
The installer can set a temperature range [C‑04]. Depending on the
energy prices, a calculated point Tcalc varies within a range between
[C‑03] and [C‑03]+[C‑04]. It is recommended to choose [C‑04] bigger
than the default value to have an optimal operation when choosing
possibility 2.
Auto restart
Electricity and gas prices
Auto restart
#
Code
Description
[7.5.1]
N/A
Electricity price > High
[7.5.2]
N/A
Electricity price > Medium
[7.5.3]
N/A
Electricity price > Low
[7.6]
N/A
Gas price
INFORMATION
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON
([9.C.1] or [C-02]). These values can only be set in menu
structure [7.5.1], [7.5.2] and [7.5.3]. Do NOT use overview
settings.
[9.C.3]
[9.C.4]
Code
[C-03]
[C-04]
Description
Bivalent ON temperature: Below this
temperature bivalent operation will
always be ON.
Operation range between which Tcalc is
calculated.
No alarm
0
Closed output
Open output
1
Open output
Closed output
No power
supply to unit
Open output
When power returns after a power supply failure, the auto restart
function reapplies the remote controller settings at the time of the
power failure. Therefore, it is recommended to always enable the
function.
If the preferential kWh rate power supply is of the type that power
supply is interrupted, always enable the auto restart function.
Continuous indoor unit control can be guaranteed independent of the
preferential kWh rate power supply status, by connecting the indoor
unit to a normal kWh rate power supply.
#
[9.E]
Code
[C-09]
Description
Auto restart:
▪ 0: Manual
When the outdoor temperature reaches below the Tcalc point, then
the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler becomes active. To
prevent too much switching, there is a hysteresis of 3°C.
#
Description
Alarm output: Indicates the logic of the
alarm output on the digital I/O PCB
during malfunctioning.
Hysteresis: Defines the temperature
difference between the ON temperature
and the OFF temperature.
Permission signal X1–X2
TA
[C-03]
a
b
TA
▪ 1 Automatic
Power saving function
Power saving function
Defines whether the outdoor unit power supply can be interrupted
(internally by indoor unit control) during stand-still conditions (no
space heating/cooling nor domestic hot water demand). The final
Permission signal X1–X2 (EKRP1HB)
Installer reference guide
72
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
decision to allow power interruption of the outdoor unit during
standstill depends on the ambient temperature, compressor
conditions and minimum internal timers.
To enable the power saving function setting, [E‑08] needs to be
enabled on the user interface.
#
[9.F]
Code
[E‑08]
Description
Power saving function for outdoor unit:
▪ 0: No
▪ 1: Yes
Disable protections
INFORMATION
The software is equipped with an "installer-on-site" mode
([9.G]: Disable protections), that disables automatic
operation by the unit. At first installation, setting Disable
protections is by default set to Yes, meaning automatic
operation is disabled. All protective functions are then
disabled. If the user interface home pages are off, the unit
will NOT operate automatically. To enable automatic
operation and the protective functions, set Disable
protections to No.
36 hours after the first power-on, the unit will automatically
set Disable protections to No, ending "installer-on-site"
mode and enabling the protective functions. If – after first
installation – the installer returns to the site, the installer
has to set Disable protections to Yes manually.
#
[9.G]
Code
N/A
Description
Disable protections
▪ 0: No
▪ 1 Yes
Forced defrost
Forced defrost
Manually start a defrost operation.
#
[9.H]
Code
N/A
Description
Do you want to start a defrost operation?
▪ Back
▪ OK
Overview field settings
All settings can be done using the menu structure. If for any reason it
is required to change a setting using the overview settings, then the
overview settings can be accessed in the field settings overview [9.I].
See "To modify an overview setting" on page 48.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
73
8 Configuration
8.5
Menu structure: Overview user settings
[1] Room
Schedule
Heating schedule
Antifrost
Setpoint range
Room sensor offset
[1.4] Antifrost
Activation
Room setpoint
[2] Main zone
[1.5] Setpoint range
Schedule
Heating schedule
Setpoint mode
Heating WD curve
Heating minimum
Heating maximum
[7.2] Time/date
[3] Additional zone
Hours
Minutes
Year
Month
Day
Daylight savings time
Format
Schedule
Heating schedule
Setpoint mode
Heating WD curve
[4] Space heating/cooling
Operation mode
[7.3] Holiday
[5] Tank
Activation
From
Till
Powerful operation
Comfort setpoint
Eco setpoint
Reheat setpoint
Schedule
[7.4] Quiet
Activation
Schedule
[7] User settings
Language
Time/date
Holiday
Quiet
Electricity price
Gas price
[7.5] Electricity price
High
Medium
Low
Schedule
[8] Information
Energy data
Malfunction history
Dealer information
Sensors
Actuators
Operation modes
About
Connection status
[8.1] Energy data
Electricity input
Produced heat
[B] User profile
[C] Operation
Room
Space heating/cooling
Tank
Setpoint screen
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings and unit type,
settings will be visible/invisible.
INFORMATION
Anti-legionella heater. In the menu structure the term
"Booster heater" is used. However, this is actually an antilegionella heater.
Installer reference guide
74
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
8 Configuration
8.6
Menu structure: Overview installer settings
[9.2] Domestic hot water
[9] Installer settings
Domestic hot water
DHW pump
DHW pump schedule
Solar
Configuration wizard
Domestic hot water
Backup heater
Booster heater
Emergency
Balancing
Water pipe freeze prevention
Benefit kWh power supply
Power consumption control
Energy metering
Sensors
Bivalent
Alarm output
Auto restart
Power saving function
Disable protections
Forced defrost
Overview field settings
[9.3] Backup heater
Backup heater type
Voltage
Configuration
Capacity step 1
Additional capacity step 2
Equilibrium
Equilibrium temperature
Operation
[9.4] Booster heater
Capacity
BSH allowance schedule
BSH eco timer
Operation
[9.6] Balancing
Space heating priority
Priority temperature
Offset BSH setpoint
Anti-recycle timer
Minimum running timer
Maximum running timer
Additional timer
[9.8] Benefit kWh power supply
Benefit kWh power supply
Allow heater
Allow pump
[9.9] Power consumption control
Power consumption control
Type
Limit
Limit 1
Limit 2
Limit 3
Limit 4
Priority heater
[9.A] Energy metering
Electricity meter 1
Electricity meter 2
[9.B] Sensors
External sensor
Ext. amb. sensor offset
Averaging time
[9.C] Bivalent
Bivalent
Boiler efficiency
Temperature
Hysteresis
INFORMATION
Solar kit settings are shown but are NOT applicable for this
unit. Settings shall NOT be used or changed.
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings and unit type,
settings will be visible/invisible.
INFORMATION
Anti-legionella heater. In the menu structure the term
"Booster heater" is used. However, this is actually an antilegionella heater.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
75
9 Commissioning
9
Commissioning
9.1
Overview: Commissioning
There are NO damaged components or squeezed
pipes on the inside of the indoor and outdoor units.
Only if you use the optional backup heater:
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to
commission the system after it is configured.
Depending on the backup heater type, backup heater
circuit breaker F1B (on the switch box of the backup
heater) is turned ON.
Typical workflow
The anti-legionella heater circuit breaker F2B (field
supply) is turned ON.
Commissioning typically consists of the following stages:
1
Checking the "Checklist before commissioning".
2
Performing an air purge.
3
Performing a test run for the system.
4
If necessary, performing a test run for one or more actuators.
5
There are NO refrigerant leaks.
The refrigerant pipes (gas and liquid) are thermally
insulated.
The correct pipe size is installed and the pipes are
properly insulated.
If necessary, performing an underfloor heating screed dryout.
There is NO water leak inside the indoor unit.
9.2
Precautions when commissioning
The shut-off valves are properly installed and fully open.
INFORMATION
The stop valves (gas and liquid) on the outdoor unit are
fully open.
During the first running period of the unit, the required
power may be higher than stated on the nameplate of the
unit. This phenomenon is caused by the compressor, that
needs a continuous run time of 50 hours before reaching
smooth operation and stable power consumption.
The air purge valve is open (at least 2 turns).
The pressure relief valve purges water when opened.
NOTICE
The minimum water volume is guaranteed in all
conditions. See "To check the water volume" in
"6.4 Preparing water piping" on page 25.
NEVER operate the unit without thermistors and/or
pressure sensors/switches. Burning of the compressor
might result.
The domestic hot water tank is filled completely.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
Do NOT operate the unit until the refrigerant piping is
complete (when operated this way, the compressor will
break).
9.3
The software is equipped with an "installer-on-site" mode
([9.G]: Disable protections), that disables automatic
operation by the unit. At first installation, setting Disable
protections is by default set to Yes, meaning automatic
operation is disabled. All protective functions are then
disabled. If the user interface home pages are off, the unit
will NOT operate automatically. To enable automatic
operation and the protective functions, set Disable
protections to No.
Checklist before commissioning
Do NOT operate the system before the following checks are OK:
You read the complete installation instructions, as
described in the installer reference guide.
The indoor unit is properly mounted.
36 hours after the first power-on, the unit will automatically
set Disable protections to No, ending "installer-on-site"
mode and enabling the protective functions. If – after first
installation – the installer returns to the site, the installer
has to set Disable protections to Yes manually.
Only if you use the optional backup heater:
The backup heater is properly mounted.
The outdoor unit is properly mounted.
The following field wiring has been carried out according
to this document and the applicable legislation:
9.4
Checklist during commissioning
To perform an air purge.
▪ Between the local supply panel and the outdoor unit
▪ Between indoor unit and outdoor unit
To perform a test run.
▪ Between the local supply panel and the indoor unit
▪ Between the indoor unit and the valves (if applicable)
To perform an actuator test run.
▪ Between the indoor unit and the room thermostat (if
applicable)
Underfloor screed dryout function
The underfloor screed dryout function is started (if
necessary).
The system is properly earthed and the earth terminals
are tightened.
The fuses or locally installed protection devices are
installed according to this document, and have NOT been
bypassed.
The power supply voltage matches the voltage on the
identification label of the unit.
There are NO loose connections or damaged electrical
components in the switch box.
Installer reference guide
76
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate
1 Confirm according to the hydraulic configuration
which space heating loops can be closed due to
mechanical, electronic, or other valves.
—
2 Close all space heating loops that can be closed
(see previous step).
—
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
9 Commissioning
3 Start the pump test run operation (see "9.4.4 To
perform an actuator test run" on page 78).
—
4 During pump test run operation, go to Sensors.
5 Select the flow rate information. During test run
operation, the unit can operate below the minimum
required flow rate.
6 Modify the bypass valve setting to reach the
minimum required flow rate + 2 l/min.
6 During manual operation, you can change the
desired pump speed. The position of the 3-way valve
must be changed between space heating and
domestic hot water. To change the settings during
the air purge, open the menu and go to Settings.
▪ Scroll to Circuit and set it to Space/Tank.
—
▪ Scroll to Pump speed and set it to Low/High.
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
7 To stop the air purge manually:
—
1 Go to Stop air purge.
12 l/min
2 Select OK to confirm.
9.4.2
Air purge function
When commissioning and installing the unit, it is very important to
remove all air in the water circuit. Open the air purge valves and
perform an air purge. When the air purge function is running, the
pump operates without actual operation of the unit and the removal
of air in the water circuit will start.
NOTICE
Before starting the air purge, open the safety valve and
check if the circuit is sufficiently filled with water. Only if
water escapes the valve after opening it, you can start the
air purge procedure.
There are 2 modes for purging air:
▪ Manual: the unit operates with a fixed pump speed and in a fixed
or custom position of the 3-way valve. The custom position of the
3-way valve is a more than helpful feature to remove all air from
the water circuit in the space heating or the domestic hot water
heating mode. Air purge must be performed for both the space
heating and the domestic hot water circuit. The operation speed of
the pump (slow or quick) can also be set.
▪ Automatic: the unit automatically changes the pump speed and
switches the position of the 3-way valve between the space
heating and the domestic hot water heating mode.
To perform an automatic air purge
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 48.
—
2 Go to [A.3]: Commissioning > Air purge.
3 In the menu, set Type = Automatic.
4 Select Start air purge.
5 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The air purge starts. It stops automatically
when done.
6 To stop the air purge manually:
—
1 Go to Stop air purge.
2 Select OK to confirm.
9.4.3
To perform an operation test run
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
Typical workflow
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 48.
Purging the air from the system should consist of:
1
Performing a manual air purge
2
—
2 Go to [A.1]: Commissioning > Operation test run.
Performing an automatic air purge
3 Select a test from the list. Example: Heating.
INFORMATION
4 Select OK to confirm.
Start by performing a manual air purge. When almost all
the air is removed, perform an automatic air purge. If
necessary, repeat performing the automatic air purge until
you are sure that all air is removed from the system.
During air purge function, pump speed limitation [9‑0D] is
NOT applicable.
The air purge function automatically stops after 30 minutes.
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
2 Go to [A.3]: Commissioning > Air purge.
3 In the menu, set Type = Manual.
4 Select Start air purge.
5 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The air purge starts. It will stop automatically
when air purge cycle is finished.
To stop the test run manually:
2 Select OK to confirm.
—
When starting up the system in a cold climate, and NO
backup heater kit was installed, it may be required to start
up with a small water volume. To do this, gradually open
the heat emitters. As a result, the water temperature will
gradually rise. Monitor the inlet water temperature ([6.1.6]
in the menu structure) and make sure it does NOT drop
below 15°C.
If the installation of the unit has been done correctly, the unit will
start up during test operation in the selected operation mode. During
test mode, the correct operation of the unit can be checked by
monitoring its leaving water temperature (heating/cooling mode) and
tank temperature (domestic hot water mode).
To monitor the temperature:
1 Go to Sensors.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
—
1 Go to Stop test run.
INFORMATION
To perform a manual air purge
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 48.
Result: The test run starts. It stops automatically
when done (±30 min).
Installer reference guide
77
9 Commissioning
2 Select the temperature information.
NOTICE
The installer is responsible for:
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run
▪ contacting the screed manufacturer for the initial
heating instructions to avoid cracking the screed,
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
▪ programming the underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule according to the above instruction of the
screed manufacturer,
Purpose of the actuator test run is to confirm the operation of the
different actuators (e.g., when you select Pump, a test run of the
pump will start).
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 48.
▪ checking the proper functioning of the setup on a
regular basis,
▪ selecting the correct program complying with the type
of the used screed of the floor.
—
2 Go to [A.2]: Commissioning > Actuator test run.
NOTICE
3 Select a test from the list. Example: Pump.
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout, room frost
protection needs to be disabled ([2‑06]=0). By default, it is
enabled ([2‑06]=1). However, due to the "installer-on-site"
mode (see "Checklist before commissioning"), room frost
protection will be automatically disabled for 36 hours after
the first power-on.
4 Select OK to confirm.
Result: The actuator test run starts. It stops
automatically when done (±30 min).
To stop the test run manually:
—
1 Go to Stop test run.
▪ Booster heater test
If the screed dryout still needs to be performed after the
first 36 hours of power-on, manually disable room frost
protection by setting [2‑06] to "0", and KEEP it disabled
until the screed dryout has finished. Ignoring this notice will
result in cracking of the screed.
▪ Backup heater 1 test
NOTICE
▪ Backup heater 2 test
For the underfloor heating screed dryout to be able to start,
make sure the following settings are met:
2 Select OK to confirm.
Possible actuator test runs
▪ Pump test
▪ [4‑00]=1
INFORMATION
▪ [C‑02]=0
Make sure that all air is purged before executing the test
run. Also avoid disturbances in the water circuit during the
test run.
▪ [D‑01]=0
▪ [4‑08]=0
▪ Shut off valve test
▪ [4‑01]≠1
▪ Diverter valve test
The installer can program up to 20 steps. For each step he needs to
enter:
▪ Bivalent signal test
▪ Alarm output test
1
the duration in hours, up to 72 hours,
▪ C/H signal test
2
the desired leaving water temperature.
Example:
▪ DHW pump test
T
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout
24h (1)
36h (2)
25°C (1)
A1
35°C (2)
This function is used for drying out the screed of an underfloor
heating system very slowly during the construction of a house. It
allows the installer to program and execute this program.
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
INFORMATION
▪ If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.6.C]=0), and the unit
is triggered to start emergency operation, the user
interface will ask confirmation before starting. The
underfloor heating screed dryout function is active even
if the user does NOT confirm emergency operation.
▪ During underfloor heating screed dryout, pump speed
limitation [9‑0D] is NOT applicable.
t
T
t
(1)
(2)
Desired leaving water temperature (15~55°C)
Duration (1~72 h)
Action step 1
Action step 2
To program an underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 48.
—
2 Go to the programming screen [A.4.2]:
Commissioning > UFH screed dryout > Program.
Installer reference guide
78
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
10 Hand-over to the user
3 Program the schedule:
—
10
Hand-over to the user
To add a new step, select an empty line and change
its value. To delete a step and all steps below it,
decrease the duration to "–".
Once the test run is finished and the unit operates properly, please
make sure the following is clear for the user:
▪ Scroll through the schedule.
▪ Fill in the installer setting table (in the operation manual) with the
actual settings.
▪ Adjust the duration (between 1 and 72 hours) and
temperatures (between 15°C and 55°C).
4 Press the left dial to save the schedule.
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout
Conditions: Make sure all operation is disabled. Go to the
Operation menu and turn off Room, Space heating/cooling and Tank
operation.
1 Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To
change the user permission level" on page 48.
—
▪ Make sure that the user has the printed documentation and ask
him/her to keep it for future reference. Inform the user that he can
find the complete documentation on the url as earlier described in
this manual.
▪ Explain the user how to properly operate the system and what to
do in case of problems.
▪ Show the user what to do in relation to maintaining the unit.
▪ Explain the user about energy saving tips as described in the
operation manual.
2 Go to [A.4]: Commissioning > UFH screed dryout.
3 Set a dryout program: go to Program and use the
UFH screed dryout programming screen.
11
4 Select OK to confirm.
Maintenance and service
NOTICE
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout starts.
It stops automatically when done.
To stop the test run manually:
Maintenance MUST be done by an authorized installer or
service agent.
—
We recommend performing maintenance at least once a
year. However, applicable legislation might require shorter
maintenance intervals.
1 Go to Stop UFH screed dryout.
2 Select OK to confirm.
NOTICE
To read out the status of an underfloor heating
screed dryout
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
Prerequisite: You are performing an underfloor heating screed
dryout.
1
Press
2
A graph highlighting the current step of the screed dryout
schedule, the total remaining time, and the current desired
leaving water temperature will be displayed.
.
Press the left dial to access the menu structure and view the status
of sensors and actuators and to adjust the current program.
To stop an underfloor heating screed dryout
11.1
Overview: Maintenance and
service
This chapter contains information about:
When the program is stopped by an error, an operation switch off, or
a power failure, the U3 error will be displayed on the user interface.
To resolve the error codes, see "12.4 Solving problems based on
error codes" on page 85.
1 Start in the UFH screed dryout screen.
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
—
▪ The yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit
▪ The yearly maintenance of the indoor unit
11.2
2 Open the menu and select Stop UFH screed dryout.
Maintenance safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
3 Select OK to confirm.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout is
stopped.
NOTICE: Risk of electrostatic discharge
When the program is stopped due to an error, an operation switchoff, or a power failure, you can read out the underfloor heating
screed dryout status:
Before performing any maintenance or service work, touch
a metal part of the unit in order to eliminate static electricity
and to protect the PCB.
1 Go to [A.4.3]: Commissioning > UFH screed dryout >
Status
2 You can read out the value here: Stopped at + the
step where the underfloor screed dryout was
stopped.
—
11.3
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the outdoor unit
3 Modify and restart the execution of the program.
—
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Outdoor unit heat exchanger.
The heat exchanger of the outdoor unit can get blocked up due to
dust, dirt, leaves, etc. It is recommended to clean the heat
exchanger yearly. A blocked heat exchanger can lead to too low
pressure or too high pressure leading to worse performance.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
79
11 Maintenance and service
11.4
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the indoor unit
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Water pressure
NOTICE
▪ When checking the magnetic filter/dirt separator for
tightness, hold it firmly, so as NOT to apply stress to
the water piping.
▪ Do NOT isolate the magnetic filter/dirt separator by
closing the shut‑off valves. To properly empty the dirt
separator, sufficient pressure is required.
▪ Magnetic filter/dirt separator
▪ Water pressure relief valve
▪ To prevent dirt from remaining in the dirt separator,
ALWAYS take off the magnetic sleeve.
▪ Relief valve hose
▪ Pressure relief valve of the domestic hot water tank
▪ Anti-legionella heater of the domestic hot water tank
▪ Switch box
▪ ALWAYS first unscrew the drain cap, and connect a
drain hose to the bottom of the water filter, then open
the drain valve.
▪ Descaling
INFORMATION
▪ Chemical disinfection
For yearly maintenance, you do not have to remove the
water filter from the unit to clean it. But in case of trouble
with the water filter, you might have to remove it so that
you can thoroughly clean it. Then you need to do as
follows:
Water pressure
Check whether the water pressure is above 1 bar. If it is lower, add
water.
▪ "11.5.1 To remove the water filter" on page 81
Magnetic filter/dirt separator
▪ "11.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble" on
page 82
▪ "11.5.3 To install the water filter" on page 82
Water pressure relief valve
a
Open the valve and check if it operates correctly. The water may be
very hot!
b
c
Checkpoints are:
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
d
a
b
c
d
Screw connection
Magnetic sleeve
Drain valve
Drain cap
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does NOT contain dirt
anymore
The yearly maintenance of the magnetic filter/dirt separator consists
of:
▪ flush the system
▪ Checking if both parts of the magnetic filter/dirt separator are still
screwed tight (a).
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
▪ Emptying the dirt separator as follows:
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
1
Take off the magnetic sleeve (b).
Pressure relief valve hose
2
Unscrew the drain cap (d).
3
Connect a drain hose to the bottom of the water filter so that the
water and dirt can be collected in a suitable container (bottle,
sink...).
Check whether the pressure relief valve hose is positioned
appropriately to drain the water. See "7.8.5 To connect the drain
hose to the drain" on page 40.
4
Open the drain valve for a couple of seconds (c).
Result: Water and dirt will come out.
Relief valve of the domestic hot water tank (field supply)
Open the valve and check the correct operation. Water may be very
hot!
Checkpoints are:
5
Close the drain valve.
6
Screw the drain cap back on.
7
Reattach the magnetic sleeve.
8
Check the pressure of the water circuit. If required, add water.
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does not contain dirt
anymore
▪ flush and clean the complete tank, including the piping between
the relief valve and cold water inlet.
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
Installer reference guide
80
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
11 Maintenance and service
Anti-legionella heater of the domestic hot water tank
11.5
It is recommended to remove lime buildup on the anti-legionella
heater to extend its life span, especially in regions with hard water.
To do so, drain the domestic hot water tank, remove the antilegionella heater from the domestic hot water tank and immerse in a
bucket (or similar) with lime-removing product for 24 hours.
About cleaning the water filter in
case of trouble
INFORMATION
For yearly maintenance, you do not have to remove the
water filter from the unit to clean it. But in case of trouble
with the water filter, you might have to remove it so that
you can thoroughly clean it. Then you need to do as
follows:
Switch box
▪ Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the switch box and look
for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
▪ "11.5.1 To remove the water filter" on page 81
▪ Using an ohmmeter, check if contactors K1M, K2M, K3M and K5M
(depending on your installation) operate correctly. All contacts of
these contactors must be in open position when the power is
turned OFF.
▪ "11.5.2 To clean the water filter in case of trouble" on
page 82
▪ "11.5.3 To install the water filter" on page 82
WARNING
If the internal wiring is damaged, it has to be replaced by
the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified
persons.
To remove the water filter
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the unit via the user interface.
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the respective circuit breaker.
Descaling
Depending on water quality and set temperature, scale can deposit
on the heat exchanger inside the domestic hot water tank and can
restrict heat transfer. For this reason, descaling of the heat
exchanger may be required at certain intervals.
Chemical disinfection
1
The water filter is located behind the switch box. To get access
to it, see:
▪ "7.2.3 To open the indoor unit" on page 30
▪ "7.2.5 To lower the switch box on the indoor unit" on
page 31
2
Close the stop valves of the water circuit.
3
Close the valve (if equipped) of the water circuit towards the
expansion vessel.
4
Remove the cap on the bottom of the water filter.
5
Connect a drain hose to the bottom of the water filter.
NOTICE
6
When using means for descaling or chemical disinfection,
it must be ensured that the water quality remains compliant
with EU directive 98/83 EC.
Open the valve on the bottom of the water filter to drain water
from the water circuit. Collect the drained water in a bottle, sink,
… using the installed drain hose.
7
Remove the 2 clips that fix the water filter.
If the applicable legislation requires a chemical disinfection in
specific situations, involving the domestic hot water tank, please be
aware that the domestic hot water tank is a stainless steel cylinder.
We recommend to use a non-chloride based disinfectant approved
for use with water intended for human consumption.
11.4.1
11.5.1
a
To drain the domestic hot water tank
b
a
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
The water in the tank can be very hot.
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the unit via the user interface.
Prerequisite: Turn OFF the respective circuit breaker.
Prerequisite: Close the cold water supply.
Prerequisite: Open all the hot water tapping points to allow air to
enter the system.
1
Remove the top panel, the user interface panel and the front
panel.
2
Connect a drain hose to the drain valve.
3
Open the drain valve.
a
b
a
Clip
Water filter
8
Remove the water filter.
9
Remove the drain hose from the water filter.
CAUTION
Although the water circuit is drained, some water may be
spilled when removing the water filter from the filter
housing. ALWAYS clean spilled water.
a
Drain valve
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
81
11 Maintenance and service
11.5.2
1
c
To clean the water filter in case of trouble
Remove the water filter from the unit. See "11.5.1 To remove
the water filter" on page 81.
CAUTION
To protect the piping connected to the water filter from
damage it is recommended to perform this procedure with
the water filter removed from the unit.
2
Unscrew the bottom of the water filter housing. Use an
appropriate tool if needed.
CAUTION
Opening the water filter is ONLY required in case of severe
issues. Preferably this action is never to be done during
the complete lifetime of the water filter.
b
b
c
a
b
c
5
a
Rolled‑up filter
Strainer
Protrusion
Install and properly tighten the bottom of the water filter
housing.
11.5.3
To install the water filter
CAUTION
Check the condition of the O-rings and replace if needed.
Apply water to the O-rings before installation.
1
Install the water filter in the correct location.
a
c
b
a
a
a
b
Bottom part to be unscrewed
Water filter housing
3
Remove the strainer and the rolled‑up filter from the water filter
housing and clean with water.
4
Install the cleaned rolled‑up filter and strainer in the water filter
housing.
INFORMATION
Correctly install the strainer in the water filter housing using
the protrusions.
a
b
c
Clip
Water filter
Air purge valve
2
Install the 2 clips to fix the water filter to the water circuit pipes.
3
Make sure that the air purge valve of the water filter is in the
open position.
4
Open the valve (if equipped) of the water circuit towards the
expansion vessel.
CAUTION
Make sure to open the valve (if equipped) towards the
expansion vessel, otherwise the overpressure will be
generated.
5
Installer reference guide
82
Open the stop valves and add water to the water circuit if
needed.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
12 Troubleshooting
12
Troubleshooting
12.1
Overview: Troubleshooting
Possible causes
The water flow is too low
▪ All shut-off valves of the water
circuit are completely open.
This chapter describes what you have to do in case of problems.
▪ The water filter is clean. Clean
if necessary.
It contains information about:
▪ There is no air in the system.
Purge air if necessary. You
can purge air manually (see
"To perform a manual air
purge" on page 77) or use the
automatic air purge function
(see "To perform an automatic
air purge" on page 77).
▪ Solving problems based on symptoms
▪ Solving problems based on error codes
Before troubleshooting
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for
obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
12.2
Corrective action
Check and make sure that:
Precautions when troubleshooting
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
WARNING
▪ When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of
the unit, ALWAYS make sure that the unit is
disconnected from the mains. Turn off the respective
circuit breaker.
▪ The valve (if equipped) of the
water circuit towards the
expansion vessel is open.
▪ The resistance in the water
circuit is NOT too high for the
pump (see the ESP curve in
the "Technical data" chapter).
▪ When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and
find out why the safety device was activated before
resetting it. NEVER bridge safety devices or change
their values to a value other than the factory default
setting. If you are unable to find the cause of the
problem, call your dealer.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer. In
some cases, it is normal that the
unit decides to use a low water
flow.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
WARNING
Prevent hazards due to inadvertent resetting of the thermal
cut-out: this appliance MUST NOT be supplied through an
external switching device, such as a timer, or connected to
a circuit that is regularly turned ON and OFF by the utility.
The water volume in the
installation is too low
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is above the
minimum required value (see
"6.4.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 26).
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
12.3.2
12.3
12.3.1
Solving problems based on
symptoms
Symptom: The unit is NOT heating as
expected
Possible causes
Corrective action
The temperature setting is NOT
correct
Check the temperature setting on
the remote controller. Refer to
the operation manual.
Symptom: The compressor does NOT
start (space heating or domestic water
heating)
Possible causes
The unit must start up out of its
operation range (the water
temperature is too low) and the
system contains a backup
heater
Corrective action
If the water temperature is too
low, the unit uses the backup
heater to reach the minimum
water temperature first (15°C).
Check and make sure that:
▪ The power supply to the
backup heater is correctly
wired.
▪ The backup heater thermal
protector is NOT activated.
▪ The backup heater contactors
are NOT broken.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
83
12 Troubleshooting
Possible causes
Corrective action
The unit must start up out of its
operation range (the water
temperature is too low) and the
system does not contain a
backup heater
Open the valve.
The water volume in the
installation is too high
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is below the
maximum allowed value (see
"6.4.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 26 and
"6.4.4 Changing the pre-pressure
of the expansion vessel" on
page 27).
If this start‑up sequence does
NOT solve the problem, it may
be required to manually start up
with a small water volume. To do
this, gradually open the heat
emitters. As a result, the water
temperature will gradually rise.
Monitor the inlet water
temperature ([8.4.8] in the menu
structure) and make sure it does
NOT drop below 15°C.
The water circuit head is too high The water circuit head is the
difference in height between the
indoor unit and the highest point
of the water circuit. If the indoor
unit is located at the highest
point of the installation, the
installation height is considered
0 m. The maximum water circuit
head is 10 m.
The preferential kWh rate power This should match with the
supply settings and electrical
connections as explained in
connections do NOT match
"6.5 Preparing electrical
wiring" on page 28 and "7.9.8 To
connect the main power
supply" on page 43.
12.3.3
Corrective action
The valve (if equipped) of the
water circuit towards the
expansion vessel is closed.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer.
The preferential kWh rate signal
was sent by the electricity
company
Possible causes
The unit is able to perform an
automatic start‑up sequence: if
the space heating circuit is too
cold and defrost operation is
required, the unit will try to
perform defrost operation on the
domestic hot water tank. If this is
NOT possible because the
domestic hot water tank is too
cold, the unit will first preheat the
tank.
Check the installation
requirements.
12.3.5
Symptom: The water pressure relief valve
leaks
Possible causes
Corrective action
Dirt is blocking the water
pressure relief valve outlet
Check whether the pressure
relief valve works correctly by
turning the red knob on the valve
counterclockwise:
Wait for the power to return (2
hours max.).
▪ If you do NOT hear a clacking
sound, contact your dealer.
▪ If the water keeps running out
of the unit, close both the
water inlet and outlet shut-off
valves first and then contact
your dealer.
Symptom: The pump is making noise
(cavitation)
Possible causes
Corrective action
There is air in the system
Purge air manually (see "To
perform a manual air purge" on
page 77) or use the automatic air
purge function (see "To perform
an automatic air purge" on
page 77).
The water pressure at the pump
inlet is too low
Check and make sure that:
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The water pressure sensor is
not broken.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
▪ The valve (if equipped) of the
water circuit towards the
expansion vessel is open.
▪ The pre-pressure setting of the
expansion vessel is correct
(see "6.4.4 Changing the prepressure of the expansion
vessel" on page 27).
12.3.6
Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently
heated at low outdoor temperatures
Possible causes
Corrective action
If the system contains a backup
heater: backup heater operation
is not activated
Check and make sure that:
▪ The backup heater operation
mode is enabled. Go to:
▪ [9.3.8]: Installer settings >
Backup heater > Operation
[4‑00]
▪ The backup heater overcurrent
fuse has not been turned off. If
it has, check the fuse and turn
it back on.
▪ The thermal protector of the
backup heater has not been
activated. If it has, check the
following, and then press the
reset button in the switch box:
▪ The water pressure
12.3.4
Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens
Possible causes
The expansion vessel is broken
Installer reference guide
84
Corrective action
▪ Whether there is air in the
system
▪ The air purge operation
Replace the expansion vessel.
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
12 Troubleshooting
Possible causes
Corrective action
If the system contains a backup
heater: the backup heater
equilibrium temperature has not
been configured correctly
Increase the "equilibrium
temperature" to activate the
backup heater operation at a
higher outdoor temperature. Go
to:
Possible causes
Corrective action
Large domestic hot water tapping
happened recently before the
programmed start-up of the
disinfection function
When Tank > Heat up mode >
Reheat only or Schedule +
reheat is selected, it is
recommended to program the
start-up the disinfection function
at least 4 hours later than the last
expected large hot water tapping.
This start-up can be set by
installer settings (disinfection
function).
▪ [9.3.7]: Installer settings >
Backup heater > Equilibrium
temperature [5‑01]
There is air in the system.
Purge air manually or
automatically. See the air purge
function in the chapter
"9 Commissioning" on page 76.
When Tank > Heat up mode >
Schedule only is selected, it is
recommended to program a Eco
action 3 hours before the
scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat
the tank.
Too much heat pump capacity is Check and make sure that the
used for heating domestic hot
"space heating priority" settings
water
have been configured
appropriately:
12.3.7
▪ Make sure that the "space
heating priority status" has
been enabled. Go to [9.6.1]:
Installer settings > Balancing >
Space heating priority [5‑02]
The disinfection operation was
Do NOT stop tank operation
stopped manually: [C.3]
during disinfection.
Operation > Tank was turned off
during disinfection.
▪ Increase the "space heating
priority
temperature"
to
activate
backup
heater
operation at a higher outdoor
temperature. Go to [9.6.3]:
Installer settings > Balancing >
Offset BSH setpoint [5‑03]
12.4
Symptom: The pressure at the tapping
point is temporarily unusually high
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief ▪ Flush and clean the complete
valve.
tank including the piping
between pressure relief valve
and the cold water inlet.
▪ Replace the pressure relief
valve.
When a problem happens, an error code appears on the user
interface. It is important to understand the problem and to take
measures before resetting the error code. This should be done by a
licensed installer or by your local dealer.
This chapter gives you an overview of all error codes and the
content of the error code as it appears on the user interface.
For a more detailed troubleshooting guideline for each error, please
see the service manual.
12.4.1
Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed
away due to a swollen tank
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief Contact your local dealer.
valve.
12.3.9
Symptom: Tank disinfection function is
NOT completed correctly (AH-error)
Possible causes
: Error
▪
: Malfunction
You can get a short and a long description of the malfunction as
follows:
1 Press the left dial to open the main menu and go to
Malfunctioning.
Result: A short description of the error and the error
code is displayed on the screen.
2 Press
in the error screen.
Result: A long description of the error is displayed
on the screen.
Corrective action
The disinfection function was
Program the start-up of the
interrupted by domestic hot water disinfection function when the
tapping
coming 4 hours NO domestic hot
water tapping is expected.
To display the help text in case of a
malfunction
In case of a malfunction, the following will appear on the home
screen depending on the severity:
▪
12.3.8
Solving problems based on error
codes
12.4.2
Error codes: Overview
Error codes of the outdoor unit
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
A1
00
Zero cross detection problem
A5
00
OU: High pressure peak cut /
freeze protection problem
E1
00
OU: PCB defect
E3
00
OU: Actuation of high pressure
switch (HPS)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
85
12 Troubleshooting
Error codes of the indoor unit
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
E5
00
OU: Overheat of inverter
compressor motor
E6
00
OU: Compressor startup defect
E7
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor unit
fan motor
E8
00
OU: Power input overvoltage
EA
00
OU: Cool/heat switchover
problem
H0
00
OU: Voltage/current sensor
problem
H3
00
OU: Malfunction of high pressure
switch (HPS)
H6
00
OU: Malfunction of position
detection sensor
H8
00
OU: Malfunction of compressor
input (CT) system
H9
00
OU: Malfunction of outdoor air
thermistor
F3
00
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe temperature
F6
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure in
cooling
FA
00
OU: Abnormal high pressure,
actuation of HPS
JA
00
OU: Malfunction of high pressure
sensor
INFORMATION
J3
00
OU: Malfunction of discharge
pipe thermistor
A malfunctioning anti-legionella heater will have an impact
on energy metering and power consumption control.
J6
00
OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor
NOTICE
J6
07
OU: Malfunction of heat
exchanger thermistor
L3
00
OU: Electrical box temperature
rise problem
L4
00
OU: Malfunction of inverter
radiating fin temperature rise
INFORMATION
L5
00
OU: Inverter instantaneous
overcurrent (DC)
Error AJ-03 is reset automatically from the moment there is
a normal tank heat-up.
P4
00
OU: Malfunction of radiating fin
temperature sensor
INFORMATION
U0
00
OU: Shortage of refrigerant
U2
00
OU: Defect of power supply
voltage
U7
00
OU: Transmission malfunction
between main CPU- INV CPU
Installer reference guide
86
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
INFORMATION
If the anti-legionella heater overheats and is disabled by
the thermostatic safety, the unit will not give an error
directly. Check if the anti-legionella heater is still in
operation if you experience one or more of the following
errors:
▪ Powerful operation takes a very long time to heat up
and the error code AJ-03 is displayed.
▪ During anti-legionella operation (weekly), the error code
AH-00 is displayed because the unit cannot reach the
requested temperature required for tank disinfection.
When the minimum water flow is lower than described in
the table below, the unit will temporarily stop operation and
the user interface will display error 7H‑01. After some time,
this error will reset automatically and the unit will resume
operation.
How an error code can be reset will be displayed on the
user interface connected on the indoor unit.
Error code UA 17: Tank type problem
Possible cause
Corrective action
No backup heater is installed,
and [E-05] is set to "0".
Set [E-05] to "1".
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
01
Water flow problem
7H
04
Water flow problem during
domestic hot water production
7H
05
Water flow problem during
heating/sampling
7H
06
Water flow problem during
cooling/defrost
7H
07
Water flow problem. Pump
deblocking active
80
00
Returning water temperature
sensor problem
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
13 Disposal
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
81
00
Leaving water temperature
sensor problem
89
01
Heat exchanger frozen
89
02
Heat exchanger frozen
89
03
Heat exchanger frozen
8F
00
Abnormal increase outlet water
temperature (DHW)
8H
00
Abnormal increase outlet water
temperature
8H
03
Overheating water circuit
(thermostat)
AA
02
External backup heater
overheated
13
Disposal
NOTICE
Do NOT try to dismantle the system yourself: the
dismantling of the system, treatment of the refrigerant, oil
and other parts MUST comply with applicable legislation.
Units MUST be treated at a specialised treatment facility
for reuse, recycling and recovery.
13.1
Overview: Disposal
Typical workflow
Disposing of the system typically consists of the following stages:
1
Pumping down the system.
2
Bringing the system to a specialized treatment facility.
AC
00
Booster heater overheated
INFORMATION
AH
00
Tank disinfection function not
completed correctly
For more details, see the service manual.
AJ
03
Too long DHW heat-up time
required
13.2
C0
00
Water flow detected while pump
is OFF
Example: To protect the environment, pump down when relocating
the unit or when disposing of the unit.
C0
01
Flow switch malfunction
C0
02
Flow switch malfunction
C4
00
Heat exchanger temperature
sensor problem
CJ
02
Room temperature sensor
problem
EC
00
Abnormal increase tank
temperature
EC
04
Tank preheating
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
H1
00
External temperature sensor
problem
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
HC
00
Tank temperature sensor
problem
HC
01
Second tank temperature sensor
problem
HJ
10
Water pressure sensor
abnormality
JA
17
Refrigerant pressure sensor
abnormality
U3
00
Under floor heating screed dryout
function not completed correctly
U4
00
Indoor/outdoor unit
communication problem
1
Remove the valve lid from the liquid stop valve and the gas stop
valve.
U5
00
User interface communication
problem
2
Install a manifold on the gas stop valve.
3
U8
01
Connection with LAN adapter lost
Carry out the forced cooling operation. See "13.3 To start and
stop forced cooling" on page 88.
U8
02
Connection with room thermostat
lost
4
U8
03
No connection with room
thermostat
After 5 to 10 minutes (after only 1 or 2 minutes in case of very
low ambient temperatures (<−10°C)), close the liquid stop valve
with a hexagonal wrench.
5
Check on the manifold if the vacuum is reached.
UA
00
Indoor unit, outdoor unit matching
problem
6
After 2-3 minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop forced
cooling operation.
UA
17
Tank type problem
UA
21
Extension/hydro mismatch
problem
UA
22
Communication problem between
control box and option box
To pump down
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
NOTICE
During pump down operation, stop the compressor before
removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still
running and the stop valve is open during pump down, air
will be sucked into the system. Compressor breakdown or
damage to the system can result due to abnormal pressure
in the refrigerant cycle.
Pump down operation will extract all refrigerant from the system into
the outdoor unit.
b
c
a
e
d
d
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
87
13 Disposal
a
b
c
d
e
13.3
Gas stop valve
Closing direction
Hexagonal wrench
Valve lid
Liquid stop valve
To start and stop forced cooling
1
Turn OFF the power.
2
Remove the switch box cover.
2×
Remove the service PCB cover.
L N PWR
1
2 3
L
S502
S2
S501
3
N
A
1
1×
2
SW4
2
1
SW6
4
3
2
1
3
4
E
D
C
B
A
COOL
SW5
HEAT
5
SW2
SW3
SW1
4
Set DIP switches SW5 and SW6 to OFF.
5
Set DIP switch SW2 to COOL.
6
Reattach the service PCB cover.
7
Turn the power back ON. Proceed with the next step within 3
minutes after restarting.
8
To start forced cooling, press the forced cooling operation
switch SW1.
9
To stop forced cooling, press the forced cooling operation
switch SW1 again.
10 Turn OFF the power, remove the switch box cover and service
PCB cover and set the DIP switches SW5, SW6 and SW2 back
to their original position.
11 Reattach the service PCB cover and switch box cover and turn
the power back ON.
NOTICE
Take care that while running forced cooling operation, the
water temperature remains higher than 5°C (see
temperature read out of the indoor unit). You can achieve
this, for example, by activating all fans of the fan coil units.
Installer reference guide
88
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
14 Technical data
14
Technical data
A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional Daikin website (publicly accessible). The full set of latest technical data is
available on the Daikin extranet (authentication required).
14.1
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit
h
7.0 CuT
R2T
7.0 CuT
7.0 CuT
4.0 CuT
g
4.0 CuT
g
4.0 CuT
g
R1T
12.7 CuT
7.0 CuT
7.0 CuT
6.4 CuT
6.4 CuT
7.0 CuT
f
Y1E
M1F
e
12.7 CuT
6.4 CuT
12.7 CuT
Y1S
R3T
9.5 CuT
S1PH
12.7 CuT
k
6.4 CuT
c
a
6.4 CuT
k
j
9.5 CuT
i
b
15.9 CuT
d
15.9 CuT
M1C
3D110394
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
M1C
M1F
R1T
R2T
R3T
S1PH
Y1E
Y1S
Field piping (liquid: Ø6.4 mm flare connection)
Field piping (gas: Ø15.9 mm flare connection)
Stop valve (liquid)
Stop valve with service port (gas)
Filter
Muffler with filter
Capillary tube
Heat exchanger
Accumulator
Compressor accumulator
Muffler
Compressor
Fan
Thermistor (outdoor air)
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
Thermistor (compressor discharge)
High pressure switch (automatic reset)
Electronic expansion valve
Solenoid valve (4‑way valve)(ON: cooling)
Heating
Cooling
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
89
14 Technical data
14.2
Piping diagram: Indoor unit
A
B
B1PW
j
C
a2
m
B2PR
d2
R1T
f
c1
k
M3S
R8T
e
b2
R5T
b1
i
R3T
j
C
a1
l
c2
d1
R4T
f
h
f
g
k
k
3D111712
A
B
C
a1
a2
b1
b2
c1
c2
d1
d2
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
Water side
Refrigerant side
Field installed
Space heating water IN
Space heating water OUT
Domestic hot water: cold water IN
Domestic hot water: hot water OUT
Gas refrigerant IN (heating mode; condenser)
Liquid refrigerant OUT (heating mode; condenser)
Liquid refrigerant IN (cooling mode; evaporator)
Gas refrigerant OUT (cooling mode; evaporator)
Plate heat exchanger
Shut-off valve for service (if equipped)
Expansion vessel
Magnetic filter/dirt separator
Safety valve
Air purge
Drain valve
Pump
Flow sensor
Installer reference guide
90
B1PW
B2PR
M3S
R1T
R3T
R4T
R5T, R8T
Space heating water pressure sensor
Refrigerant pressure sensor
3-way valve (space heating/domestic hot water)
Thermistor (heat exchanger – water OUT)
Thermistor (liquid refrigerant)
Thermistor (heat exchanger – water IN)
Thermistor (tank)
Screw connection
Flare connection
Quick coupling
Brazed connection
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
14 Technical data
14.3
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the top plate). The abbreviations used are listed below.
(1) Connection diagram
R3T
Thermistor (discharge)
RTH2
Resistor
S
Connector
S1PH
High pressure switch
S20~502
Connector
SA1
Surge arrestor
Notes
SHM
Terminal strip fixed plate
Connection
SW*
Push button
Main terminal
U, V, W
Connector
Earth wiring
V3, V4, V401
Varistor
Field supply
X*A
Connector
Option
X*M
Terminal strip
Switch box
Y1E
Electronic expansion valve
PCB
Y1S
Solenoid valve (4-way valve)
Wiring depending on model
Z*C
Noise filter (ferrite core)
Protective earth
Z*F
English
Translation
Connection diagram
Connection diagram
(2) Notes
English
Translation
Notes
X1M
Field wire
Noise filter
*
#
Optional
Field supply
NOTES:
1
When operating, do not short-circuit protection device S1PH.
2
Refer to the combination table and the option manual for how
to connect the wiring to X6A, X28A and X77A.
3
Colours: BLK: black; RED: red; BLU: blue; WHT: white; GRN:
green; YLW: yellow
(3) Legend
AL*
Connector
C*
Capacitor
DB*
Rectifier bridge
DC*
Connector
DP*
Connector
E*
Connector
F1U
Fuse T 6.3 A 250 V
FU1, FU2
Fuse T 3.15 A 250 V
FU3
Fuse T 30 A 250 V
H*
Connector
IPM*
Intelligent power module
L
Connector
LED 1~5
Indication lamp
LED A
Pilot lamp
L*
Reactor
M1C
Compressor motor
M1F
Fan motor
MR*
Magnetic relay
N
Connector
PCB1
Printed circuit board (main)
PCB2
Printed circuit board (service)
PS
Switching power supply
Q1L
Thermal protector
Q1DI
# Earth leakage circuit breaker
Q*
Insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT)
R1T
Thermistor (air)
R2T
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
91
14 Technical data
14.4
Wiring diagram: Indoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the indoor unit switch box cover). The abbreviations used are listed
below.
Notes to go through before starting the unit
English
Translation
A3P
* Heat pump convector
A4P
* Digital I/O PCB
* Demand PCB
Notes to go through before
starting the unit
Notes to go through before
starting the unit
A8P
A9P
Status indicator
X1M
Main terminal
A10P
X2M
Field wiring terminal for AC
MMI (= user interface connected to the
indoor unit) – Power supply unit PCB
X3M
Backup heater terminal
A11P
X5M
Field wiring terminal for DC
MMI (= user interface connected to the
indoor unit) – Main PCB
X8M
Anti-legionella heater power
supply terminal
Earth wiring
A12P
* LAN adapter
A14P
* User interface used as room thermostat –
PCB
A15P
* Receiver PCB (wireless On/OFF thermostat)
Field supply
1
Several wiring possibilities
Option
Not mounted in switch box
MMI display PCB
A13P
B1L
Flow sensor
B1PR
Refrigerant pressure sensor
B1PW
Water pressure sensor
Wiring depending on model
CN* (A4P)
* Connector
PCB
DS1(A8P)
* DIP switch
Note 1: Connection point of the
power supply for the antilegionella heater should be
foreseen outside the unit.
Note 1: Connection point of the
power supply for the antilegionella heater should be
foreseen outside the unit.
F2B
# Overcurrent fuse anti-legionella heater
Optional backup heater power
supply
Optional backup heater power
supply
FU1 (A1P)
Fuse T 5 A 250 V for PCB
F2T
F1U, F2U (A4P)
Thermal fuse anti-legionella heater
* Fuse 5 A 250 V for digital I/O PCB
FU2 (A10P)
Fuse T 1.6 A 250 V for PCB
1N~, 230 V, 6 kW
1N~, 230 V, 6 kW
K3M
Contactor anti-legionella heater
3N~, 400 V, 6 kW
3N~, 400 V, 6 kW
K*R (A4P)
Relay on PCB
User installed options
User installed options
M1P
Main supply pump
LAN adapter
LAN adapter
M2P
# Domestic hot water pump
Backup heater
Backup heater
M2S
# 2-way valve for cooling mode
Remote user interface
User interface used as room
thermostat
M3S
Ext. indoor thermistor
External indoor thermistor
P1M
Ext outdoor thermistor
External outdoor thermistor
PC (A15P)
* Power circuit
Digital I/O PCB
Digital I/O PCB
PHC1 (A4P)
* Optocoupler input circuit
Demand PCB
Q2L
Demand PCB
Main LWT
3-way valve for floorheating/domestic hot
water
MMI display
Thermal protector anti-legionella heater
Main leaving water temperature
Q4L
# Safety thermostat
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
Q*DI
# Earth leakage circuit breaker
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
R1H (A2P)
* Humidity sensor
Ext. thermistor
External thermistor
R1T (A1P )
Heat pump convector
Heat pump convector
R1T (A2P)
* Ambient sensor On/OFF thermostat
R1T (A14P)
* Ambient sensor user interface
R2T (A2P)
* External sensor (floor or ambient)
Add LWT
Additional leaving water
temperature
Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
R3T
Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
R4T
Inlet water thermistor
Ext. thermistor
External thermistor
R5T, R8T
Domestic hot water thermistor
Heat pump convector
Heat pump convector
R6T
* External indoor or outdoor ambient
thermistor
S1S
# Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
S2S
# Electrical meter pulse input 1
S3S
# Electrical meter pulse input 2
Legend
S6S~S9S
* Digital power limitation inputs
A1P
SS1 (A4P)
* Selector switch
Position in switch box
English
Translation
Position in switch box
A2P
Main PCB
* On/OFF thermostat (PC=power circuit)
Installer reference guide
92
Position in switch box
SW1~2 (A12P)
Turn buttons
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
14 Technical data
SW3~5 (A12P)
Push buttons
TR1
Power supply transformer
X8M
English
# Anti-legionella heater power supply terminal
strip
Translation
Electrical meters
Electrical meters
For safety thermostat
For safety thermostat
Inrush
Inrush current
X*, X*A, X*Y, Y*
Connector
Max. load
Maximum load
X*M
Terminal strip
Normally closed
Normally closed
Normally open
Normally open
Safety thermostat contact: 16 V
DC detection (voltage supplied
by PCB)
Safety thermostat contact:
16 V DC detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
(1) Main power connection
Shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
For preferential kWh rate power
supply
SWB
Switch box
(7) Optional BUH
(7) Optional backup heater
Indoor unit supplied from outdoor Indoor unit supplied from outdoor
SWB
Switch box
Normal kWh rate power supply
Normal kWh rate power supply
(7) Option PCBs
(7) Option PCBs
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Alarm output
Alarm output
Changeover to ext. heat source
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (outdoor)
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (outdoor)
Changeover to external heat
source
Max. load
Maximum load
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Min. load
Minimum load
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by
PCB)
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by
PCB)
Only for demand PCB option
Only for demand PCB option
Only for digital I/O PCB option
Only for digital I/O PCB option
SWB
Switch box
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for indoor unit
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for indoor unit
(3) User interface
(3) User interface
Only for LAN adapter
Only for the LAN adapter
Only for remote user interface
EKRUDAS
Only for the user interface used
as room thermostat (EKRUDAS)
(4) Domestic hot water tank
(4) Domestic hot water tank
Anti-legionella heater power
supply
Anti-legionella heater power
supply
SWB
Switch box
(5) Ext. thermistor
(5) External thermistor
SWB
Switch box
(6) Field supplied options
(6) Field supplied options
*
#
Optional
Field supply
Translation of text on wiring diagram
English
Translation
(1) Main power connection
For preferential kWh rate power
supply
12 V DC pulse detection (voltage 12 V DC pulse detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
supplied by PCB)
230 V AC supplied by PCB
230 V AC supplied by PCB
Continuous
Continuous current
DHW pump output
Domestic hot water pump output
DHW pump
Domestic hot water pump
Options: ext. heat source output, Options: external heat source
alarm output
output, alarm output
Options: On/OFF output
Options: On/OFF output
Power limitation digital inputs: 12 Power limitation digital inputs:
V DC / 12 mA detection (voltage 12 V DC / 12 mA detection
supplied by PCB)
(voltage supplied by PCB)
Space C/H On/OFF output
Space cooling/heating On/OFF
output
SWB
Switch box
(8) External On/OFF thermostats (8) External On/OFF thermostats
and heat pump convector
and heat pump convector
Additional LWT zone
Additional leaving water
temperature zone
Main LWT zone
Main leaving water temperature
zone
Only for external sensor (floor/
ambient)
Only for external sensor (floor or
ambient)
Only for heat pump convector
Only for heat pump convector
Only for wired On/OFF
thermostat
Only for wired On/OFF
thermostat
Only for wireless On/OFF
thermostat
Only for wireless On/OFF
thermostat
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
93
14 Technical data
Electrical connection diagram
For more details, please check the unit wiring.
Standard part
Power supply
Outdoor unit
1 Only for normal power supply installation
unit power supply: 230 V + earth
3 core
Notes:
- In case of signal cable: keep minimum distance to power cables >5 cm
X1M: L-N-earth
1 Only for preferential kWh rate power supply installation
unit preferential kWh rate power supply:
230 V + earth
Normal kWh rate power supply for indoor unit: 230 V
2
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
3 core
2 core
2 core
2x0.75
X1M: 1-2-3
3 core
Field supply
2
Field supply
Indoor unit
Safety thermostat Q4L
Only for *KRP1HB*
X1M: 1-2-3
X2M: 5-6
X5M: 9-10
Power supply
Anti-legionella heater power supply (2, 4 kW): 230 V + earth
3 core
X8M: L-N-earth
A4P: Y1-YC
X2M: 7-9
Alarm output
2 core
A4P: X1-X2
Changeover to
ext. heat source output
2 core
A4P: Y2-YC
X2M: 7-9
Cooling/heating
On/OFF output
2 core
X2M: 1-2
Backup heater option
(EKLBUHCB6W1)
Thermistor
X15M: 1-2
Step 1-2
X15M: 8-9-10
Clixon Q1L
X15M: 6-7
2 core
signal
5 core
230 V
NO valve: X2M: 21-28
NC valve: X2M: 21-29
X5M: 1-2
X5M: 5-6
X3M: 3-4-5
X5M: 3-4
X3M: 1-2
Backup heater power supply (6 kW): 400 V or 230 V + earth
X5M: 7-8
3-5 core
main: X2M: 30-34-35
add: X2M: 30-34a-35a
Field supply
Only for *KRP1AHTA
Power limitation
demand input 2
Power limitation
demand input 3
Power limitation
demand input 4
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
2 core
signal
Cooling/heating
On/OFF output
230 V
2 core
Circulation pump for DHW
230 V
2-way valve
2 core
M2S for cooling mode
230 V
2 core
Electricity meter pulse input 1
signal
2 core
Electricity meter pulse input 2
signal
2 core
signal
external thermistor (indoor or outdoor)
External room thermostat / Heat pump convector
(main and/or additional zone)
3
Power limitation
demand input 1
Ext. heat source (e.g. boiler)
signal
Only for KRCS01-1 or EKRSCA1
F1B:
L1-L2-L3-N + PE
or L-N + PE
Power supply
Alarm indication
230 V
3
main: X2M: 30-31-34-35
add: X2M: 30-31-34a-35a
A8P: X801M: 1-5
A8P: X801M: 2-5
A8P: X801M: 3-5
3
main: X2M: 30-35
add: X2M: 30-35a
3 core for C/H operation
2 core for H only operation
signal
5 core for C/H operation
4 core for H only operation
signal
2 core
signal
Optional part
Only for *KRTW
(wired room thermostat)
A2P: X1M: C-com-H
Only for *KRTR
(wireless room thermostat)
A15P: X1M: H-C-com
X2M: L-N
2 core
(3m included)
A2P: X1M: 1-3
signal
Only for *KRTETS
R2T
External sensor
(floor or ambient)
Only for
(heat pump convector)
A3P: X11M: 5-6
A8P: X801M: 4-5
X5M: 11-12
2 core
2x0.75
communication
2 core
2x0.75
communication
Only for EKRUDAS
A14P: P1-P2 user interface
A13P: P1-P2 LAN adapter
4D112068B
Installer reference guide
94
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
14 Technical data
14.5
INFORMATION
Table 1 – Maximum refrigerant
charge allowed in a room: indoor
unit
Aroom (m2)
▪ For floorstanding models, the value of "Installation
height (H)" is considered 600 mm to comply to
IEC 60335-2-40:2013 A1 2016 Clause GG2.
▪ For intermediate mc values (i.e. when mc is between
two values from the table), consider the value that
corresponds to the higher mc value from the table. If
mc=1.87 kg, consider the value that corresponds to
"mc=1.88 kg".
Maximum refrigerant charge in a room
(mmax) (kg)
H=600 mm
1
0.138
2
0.276
3
0.414
▪ Systems with total refrigerant charge lower than
1.84 kg are not subjected to any room requirements.
4
0.553
▪ Charges above 1.9 kg are not allowed in the unit.
5
0.691
6
0.829
7
0.907
8
0.970
9
1.028
10
1.084
11
1.137
12
1.187
13
1.236
14
1.283
15
1.328
16
1.371
17
1.413
18
1.454
19
1.494
20
1.533
21
1.571
22
1.608
23
1.644
24
1.679
25
1.714
26
1.748
27
1.781
28
1.814
29
1.846
30
1.877
31
1.909
14.7
mc
Table 3 – Minimum venting
opening area for natural
ventilation: indoor unit
mmax dm=mc–mmax (kg) Minimum venting opening area
(cm2)
H=600 mm
1.9
0.1
1.80
729
1.9
0.3
1.60
648
1.9
0.5
1.40
567
1.9
0.7
1.20
486
1.9
0.9
1.00
418
1.9
1.1
0.80
370
1.9
1.3
0.60
301
1.9
1.5
0.40
216
1.9
1.7
0.20
115
INFORMATION
▪ For floorstanding models, the value of "Installation
height (H)" is considered 600 mm to comply to
IEC 60335-2-40:2013 A1 2016 Clause GG2.
▪ For intermediate dm values (i.e. when dm is between
two dm values from the table), consider the value that
corresponds to the higher dm value from the table. If
dm=1.55 kg, consider the value that corresponds to
"dm=1.6 kg".
INFORMATION
▪ For floorstanding models, the value of "Installation
height (H)" is considered 600 mm to comply to
IEC 60335-2-40:2013 A1 2016 Clause GG2.
▪ For intermediate Aroom values (i.e. when Aroom is
between two values from the table), consider the value
that corresponds to the lower Aroom value from the table.
If Aroom=12.5 m2, consider the value that corresponds to
"Aroom=12 m2".
14.6
Table 2 – Minimum floor area:
indoor unit
mc (kg)
Minimum floor area (m²)
H=600 mm
1.84
28.81
1.86
29.44
1.88
30.08
1.90
30.72
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
Installer reference guide
95
15 Glossary
14.8
ESP curve: Indoor unit
Note: A flow error will occur when the minimum water flow rate is not
reached.
A (kPa)
70
Accessories
Labels, manuals, information sheets and equipment that are
delivered with the product and that need to be installed
according to the instructions in the accompanying
documentation.
Optional equipment
Equipment made or approved by Daikin that can be
combined with the product according to the instructions in
the accompanying documentation.
60
50
40
30
Field supply
Equipment NOT made by Daikin that can be combined with
the product according to the instructions in the
accompanying documentation.
C
20
10
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
B (l/min)
4D112012
A
B
C
External static pressure in the space heating/cooling circuit
Water flow rate through the unit in the space heating/
cooling circuit
Operation range
Dashed lines: Operation area is extended to lower flow rates only in
case the unit operates with heat pump only. (Not in startup, no
backup heater operation, no defrost operation.)
Notes:
▪ Selecting a flow outside the operating area can damage the unit or
cause the unit to malfunction. See also the minimum and
maximum allowed water flow range in the technical specifications.
▪ Water quality must be according to EU directive 98/83 EC.
15
Glossary
Dealer
Sales distributor for the product.
Authorized installer
Technical skilled person who is qualified to install the
product.
User
Person who is owner of the product and/or operates the
product.
Applicable legislation
All international, European, national and local directives,
laws, regulations and/or codes that are relevant and
applicable for a certain product or domain.
Service company
Qualified company which can perform or coordinate the
required service to the product.
Installation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to install, configure and maintain
it.
Operation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to operate it.
Maintenance instructions
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, which explains (if relevant) how to install,
configure, operate and/or maintain the product or
application.
Installer reference guide
96
Final English - Tanslations in progress
ERGA04~08DAV3(A) + EHVH04+08S23DAV
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P499573-1 – 2017.12
1/9
Field settings table
[8.7.5] = .... 7401
Applicable indoor units
EHVH04S23DAV*
EHVH08S23DAV*
Notes
Final English - Tanslations in progress
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
2/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
Room
1.4.1
1.4.2
└─ Antifrost
[2-06]
[2-05]
Activation
R/W
Room setpoint
R/W
└─ Setpoint range
[3-07]
Heating minimum
R/W
[3-06]
Heating maximum
R/W
Room
1.6
[2-09]
Room sensor offset
R/W
1.7
[2-0A]
Room sensor offset
R/W
1.5.1
1.5.2
Main zone
2.4
2.5
2.5
Setpoint mode
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
4~16°C, step: 1°C
16°C
12~18°C, step: 0,5°C
12°C
18~30°C, step: 0,5°C
30°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: Fixed
2: Weather dependent
└─ Heating WD curve
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
[1-00]
R/W
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
2.5
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
2.5
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
Main zone
2.7
[2-0C]
Emitter type
R/W
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
└─ Setpoint range
Heating minimum
[9-01]
R/W
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
[2-0C]=2:
37~65, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0C]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
2.8.1
2.8.2
[9-00]
Heating maximum
R/W
Main zone
2.9
[C-07]
Control
R/W
2.A
[C-05]
Thermostat type
R/W
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: No
1: Yes
0~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
2.B.1
└─ Delta T
[1-0B]
Delta T heating
2.C.1
└─ Modulation
[8-05]
Modulation
R/W
2.C.2
[8-06]
Max modulation
R/W
2.D.1
└─ Shut off valve
[F-0B]
During thermo
Additional zone
3.4
3.5
3.5
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
0: Fixed
2: Weather dependent
Setpoint mode
└─ Heating WD curve
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
[0-00]
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: 1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
R/W
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
3.5
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
3.5
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
Emitter type
R/W
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
└─ Setpoint range
Heating minimum
[9-05]
R/W
Heating maximum
R/W
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
[2-0D]=2:
37~65, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0D]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
Thermostat type
R/W
0: 1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
Delta T heating
Additional zone
3.7
[2-0D]
3.8.1
3.8.2
[9-06]
Additional zone
3.A
[C-06]
3.B.1
└─ Delta T
[1-0C]
R/W
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[0-01]
R/W
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
Space heating / cooling
└─ Operation range
4.3.1
[4-02]
Space heating OFF temp
R/W
14~35°C, step: 1°C
22°C
Space heating / cooling
4.4
[7-02]
Number of zones
R/W
4.5
[F-0D]
Pump operation mode
R/W
4.6
[E-02]
Unit type
R/O
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
1: Heating only
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
3/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
4.7
[9-0D]
Pump limitation
Range, step
Default value
R/W
0~8, step:1
0 : No limitation
1~4 : 50~80%
5~8 : 50~80% during sampling
6
0: Restricted
1: Allowed
0: No
1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
4: increase 4°C, span 8°C
Space heating / cooling
4.9
[F-00]
Pump outside range
R/W
4.A
[D-03]
Increase around 0°C
R/W
4.B
[9-04]
Overshoot
R/W
4.C
R/W
[2-06]
Antifrost
Tank
5.2
[6-0A]
Comfort setpoint
R/W
5.3
[6-0B]
Eco setpoint
R/W
5.4
[6-0C]
Reheat setpoint
R/W
5.6
[6-0D]
Heat up mode
R/W
5.7.1
└─ Disinfection
Activation
[2-01]
5.7.2
R/W
[2-00]
Operation day
R/W
5.7.3
[2-02]
Start time
R/W
5.7.4
[2-03]
Tank setpoint
R/O
5.7.5
R/W
[2-04]
Duration
Tank
5.8
[6-0E]
Maximum
R/W
5.9
[6-00]
Hysteresis
R/W
5.A
[6-08]
Hysteresis
R/W
Setpoint mode
R/W
5.B
5.C
└─ WD curve
[0-0B]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
5.C
[0-0C]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
0: No
1: Yes
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
1
55~75°C, step: 5°C
70°C
5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
40~65°C, step: 1°C
65°C
2~40°C, step: 1°C
25°C
2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0: Fixed
1: Weather dependent
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
65°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
5.C
[0-0D]
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
5.C
[0-0E]
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
Tank
5.D
[6-01]
Margin
R/W
0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
Activation
R/W
0: OFF
1: Quiet
2: More quiet
3: Most quiet
4: Automatic
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
1/kWh
User settings
└─ Quiet
7.4.1
7.5.1
└─ Electricity price
High
7.5.2
Medium
R/W
7.5.3
Low
R/W
User settings
7.6
Gas price
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0,00~290/MBtu
1,0/kWh
Installer settings
└─ Configuration wizard
└─ System
BUH type
9.1
[E-03]
R/W
0: No heater
1: External heater
2: 3V
3: 6V
4: 9W
3: Integrated
Domestic hot water
9.1
[E-05]
[E-06]
[E-07]
[4-06]
Emergency
R/W
9.1
[7-02]
Number of zones
R/W
9.1
[5-0D]
9.1
└─ Backup heater
Voltage
R/O
R/O
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: Manual
1: Automatic
0: Single zone
1: Dual zone
0~2
0: 230V, 1~
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
4/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
9.1
[4-0A]
Configuration
R/O
9.1
[6-03]
Capacity step 1
R/W
9.1
[6-04]
Additional capacity step 2
R/O
9.1
[2-0C]
└─ Main zone
Emitter type
9.1
[C-07]
Control
R/W
Setpoint mode
R/W
R/W
0~3
0: 1
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
9.1
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
9.1
9.1
[1-06]
[1-07]
[1-08]
----
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: Fixed
2: Weather dependent
0: No
1: Yes
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
20
35
22
9.1
[1-09]
--
18
9.1
Schedule
R/W
9.1
9.1
[1-00]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[2-0D]
└─ Additional zone
Emitter type
R/W
9.1
[0-01]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
[0-04]
--
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
0: Fixed
2: Weather dependent
0: No
1: Yes
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
8
9.1
[0-05]
--
12
9.1
9.1
[0-06]
[0-07]
9.1
[6-0D]
9.1
Setpoint mode
9.1
Schedule
R/W
[0-00]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.1
--└─ Tank
Heat up mode
R/W
35
20
R/W
9.1
[6-0A]
Comfort setpoint
R/W
9.1
[6-0B]
Eco setpoint
R/W
[6-0C]
Reheat setpoint
R/W
9.1
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.4
9.3.1
└─ Domestic hot water
Domestic hot water
[E-05]
[E-06]
[E-07]
[D-02]
DHW pump
[D-07]
R/O
3: Integrated
R/W
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. Shunt
0: No
1: Yes
R/W
Solar
└─ Back up heater
[E-03]
BUH type
R/W
9.3.2
[5-0D]
Voltage
R/O
9.3.3
[4-0A]
Configuration
R/O
9.3.4
[6-03]
Capacity step 1
R/W
9.3.5
[6-04]
Additional capacity step 2
R/O
9.3.6
[5-00]
Equilibrium
R/W
9.3.7
[5-01]
Equilibrium temperature
R/W
9.3.8
[4-00]
Operation
R/W
9.4.1
└─ Booster heater
Capacity
[6-02]
R/W
9.4.3
[8-03]
BSH eco timer
R/W
9.4.4
[4-03]
Operation
R/W
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
0: No heater
1: External heater
2: 3V
3: 6V
4: 9W
0~2
0: 230V, 1~
0~3
0: 1
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Only DHW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
2,4kW
20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
0: Restricted
1: Allowed
2: Overlap
3: Compressor off
4: Legionella only
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
5/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Installer settings
9.5
[4-06]
Setting name
Emergency
Range, step
Default value
R/W
0: Manual
1: Automatic
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
3 hours
0~20 min, step 1 min
1 min
5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
9.6.1
└─ Balancing
[5-02]
Space heating priority
R/W
9.6.2
[5-03]
Priority temperature
R/W
9.6.3
[5-04]
Offset BSH setpoint
R/W
9.6.4
[8-02]
Anti-recycle timer
R/W
9.6.5
[8-00]
Minimum running timer
R/W
9.6.6
[8-01]
Maximum running timer
R/W
9.6.7
[8-04]
Additional timer
R/W
Installer settings
9.7
[4-04]
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
9.9.1
Water pipe freeze prevention
└─ Benefit kWh power supply
Benefit kWh power supply
[D-01]
0: Intermittent
1: Continuous
2: Off
R/W
[D-00]
Allow heater
R/W
[D-05]
Allow pump
R/W
└─ Power consumption control
Power consumption control
[4-08]
R/W
9.9.2
[4-09]
Type
R/W
9.9.3
[5-05]
Limit
R/W
9.9.4
[5-05]
Limit 1
R/W
9.9.5
[5-06]
Limit 2
R/W
9.9.6
[5-07]
Limit 3
R/W
9.9.7
[5-08]
Limit 4
R/W
9.9.8
[5-09]
Limit
R/W
9.9.9
[5-09]
Limit 1
R/W
9.9.A
[5-0A]
Limit 2
R/W
9.9.B
[5-0B]
Limit 3
R/W
9.9.C
[5-0C]
Limit 4
R/W
9.9.D
[4-01]
Priority heater
9.A.1
9.A.2
9.B.1
└─ Energy metering
[D-08]
Electricity meter 1
[D-09]
└─ Sensors
[C-08]
R/W
Electricity meter 2
R/W
External sensor
R/W
9.B.2
[2-0B]
Ext. amb. sensor offset
R/W
9.B.3
[1-0A]
Averaging time
R/W
Bivalent
R/W
[7-05]
Boiler efficiency
R/W
9.C.3
[C-03]
Temperature
R/W
9.C.4
[C-04]
Hysteresis
R/W
Installer settings
9.D
[C-09]
Alarm output
R/W
9.E
Auto restart
R/W
9.C.1
9.C.2
└─ Bivalent
[C-02]
[3-00]
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: No
1: Active open
2: Active closed
3: Safety thermostat
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: Forced off
1: As normal
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
0: Current
1: Power
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
0: No
1: Bivalent
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
-25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~10°C, step 1°C
3°C
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0: No
1: Yes
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
6/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
9.F
9.G
[E-08]
Power saving function
Disable protections
9.I
└─ Overview field settings
[0-00]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
Range, step
Default value
R/O
R/W
1: Enabled
0: No
1: Yes
R/W
9.I
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-04]
--
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
50°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
8
9.I
[0-05]
--
12
9.I
9.I
9.I
[0-06]
[0-07]
[0-0B]
--Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-0C]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-0D]
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[0-0E]
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-00]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
R/W
9.I
[0-01]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
9.I
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
9.I
[1-04]
--
35
20
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
65°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
1
9.I
[1-05]
--
1
9.I
9.I
9.I
[1-06]
[1-07]
[1-08]
----
20
35
22
9.I
[1-09]
--
18
9.I
[1-0A]
What is the averaging time for the outdoor temp?
R/W
9.I
[1-0B]
What is the desired delta T in heating for the main zone?
R/W
9.I
[1-0C]
What is the desired delta T in heating for the additional zone?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
[1-0D]
[1-0E]
[2-00]
--When should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
9.I
[2-01]
Should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
9.I
[2-02]
When should the disinfection function start?
R/W
9.I
[2-03]
What is the disinfection target temperature?
R/O
9.I
[2-04]
How long must the tank temperature be maintained?
R/W
9.I
[2-05]
Room antifrost temperature
R/W
9.I
[2-06]
Room frost protection
R/W
9.I
[2-09]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
9.I
[2-0A]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
9.I
[2-0B]
What is the required offset on the measured outdoor temp.?
R/W
9.I
[2-0C]
What emitter type is connected to the main LWT zone?
R/W
9.I
[2-0D]
What emitter type is connected to the additional LWT zone?
R/W
9.I
[3-00]
Is auto restart of the unit allowed?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
[3-01]
[3-02]
[3-03]
[3-04]
[3-05]
[3-06]
-----What is the maximum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
9.I
[3-07]
What is the mimimum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
[3-08]
[3-09]
[4-00]
--What is the BUH operation mode?
R/W
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
5
5
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0: No
1: Yes
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
1
55~75°C, step: 5°C
70°C
5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
4~16°C, step: 1°C
16°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
0: Underfloor heating
1: Fancoil unit
2: Radiator
0: No
1: Yes
0
1
4
2
1
18~30°C, step: 0,5°C
30°C
12~18°C, step: 0,5°C
12°C
35
15
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Only DHW
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
7/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
9.I
[4-01]
Which electric heater has priority?
Range, step
Default value
R/W
9.I
[4-02]
Below which outdoor temperature is heating allowed?
R/W
9.I
[4-03]
Operation permission of the booster heater.
R/W
9.I
[4-04]
Water pipe freeze prevention
9.I
9.I
[4-05]
[4-06]
-Emergency
R/W
9.I
[4-08]
Which power limitation mode is required on the system?
R/W
9.I
[4-09]
Which power limitation type is required?
R/W
9.I
[4-0A]
Backup heater configuration
R/O
9.I
9.I
9.I
[4-0B]
[4-0D]
[5-00]
R/W
R/W
9.I
[5-01]
--Is backup heater operation allowed above equilibrium temperature during space
heating operation?
What is the equilibrium temperature for the building?
9.I
[5-02]
Space heating priority.
R/W
9.I
[5-03]
Space heating priority temperature.
R/W
9.I
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot water temperature.
R/W
9.I
[5-05]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
R/W
9.I
[5-06]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
R/W
9.I
[5-07]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
R/W
9.I
[5-08]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
R/W
9.I
[5-09]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
R/W
9.I
[5-0A]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
R/W
9.I
[5-0B]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
R/W
9.I
[5-0C]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
R/W
R/O
9.I
[5-0D]
Backup heater voltage
9.I
9.I
[5-0E]
[6-00]
-The temperature difference determining the heat pump ON temperature.
R/W
9.I
[6-01]
The temperature difference determining the heat pump OFF temperature.
R/W
9.I
[6-02]
What is the capacity of the booster heater?
R/W
9.I
[6-03]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 1?
R/W
9.I
[6-04]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 2?
R/O
9.I
9.I
9.I
[6-05]
[6-06]
[6-07]
--What is the capacity of the bottom plate heater?
R/W
9.I
[6-08]
What is the hysteresis to be used in reheat mode?
R/W
9.I
9.I
[6-09]
[6-0A]
-What is the desired comfort storage temperature?
R/W
9.I
[6-0B]
What is the desired eco storage temperature?
R/W
9.I
[6-0C]
What is the desired reheat temperature?
R/W
9.I
[6-0D]
What is the desired DHW production type?
R/W
9.I
[6-0E]
What is the maximum temperature setpoint?
R/W
9.I
[7-00]
Domestic hot water booster heater overshoot temperature.
R/W
9.I
[7-01]
Domestic hot water booster heater hysteresis.
R/W
9.I
[7-02]
How many leaving water temperature zones are there?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
[7-03]
[7-04]
[7-05]
--Boiler efficiency
R/W
9.I
[8-00]
Minimum running time for domestic hot water operation.
R/W
9.I
[8-01]
Maximum running time for domestic hot water operation.
R/W
9.I
[8-02]
Anti-recycling time.
R/W
9.I
[8-03]
Booster heater delay timer.
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
14~35°C, step: 1°C
22°C
0: Restricted
1: Allowed
2: Overlap
3: Compressor off
4: Legionella only
0: Intermittent
1: Continuous
2: Off
0
0: Manual
1: Automatic
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
0: Current
1: Power
0~3
0: 1
1
3
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~3
0: 230V, 1~
1
2~40°C, step: 1°C
25°C
0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
2,4kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0
0
0~200W, step: 10W
0W
2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
40~65°C, step: 1°C
65°C
0~4°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~40°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
2.5
0
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
0~20 min, step 1 min
1 min
5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
3 hours
20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
8/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
9.I
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum running time.
R/W
9.I
[8-05]
Allow modulation of the LWT to control the room temp?
R/W
R/W
9.I
[8-06]
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation.
9.I
9.I
9.I
[8-07]
[8-08]
[8-09]
--What is the desired comfort main LWT in heating?
R/W
9.I
[8-0A]
What is the desired eco main LWT in heating?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
[8-0B]
[8-0C]
[8-0D]
[9-00]
---What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
9.I
[9-01]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
[9-02]
[9-03]
[9-04]
--Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature.
R/W
9.I
[9-05]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
9.I
[9-06]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
9.I
9.I
9.I
[9-07]
[9-08]
[9-0C]
--Room temperature hysteresis.
R/W
9.I
[9-0D]
Pump speed limitation
R/W
9.I
9.I
[9-0E]
[C-00]
-Domestic heating water priority.
R/W
9.I
9.I
[C-01]
[C-02]
-Is an external backup heat source connected?
R/W
9.I
[C-03]
Bivalent activation temperature.
R/W
9.I
[C-04]
Bivalent hysteresis temperature.
R/W
9.I
[C-05]
What is the thermo request contact type for the main zone?
R/W
9.I
[C-06]
What is the thermo request contact type for the add. zone?
R/W
9.I
[C-07]
What is the unit control method in space operation?
R/W
9.I
[C-08]
Which type of external sensor is installed?
R/W
9.I
[C-09]
What is the required alarm output contact type?
R/W
9.I
9.I
[C-0A]
[D-00]
-Which heaters are permitted if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
9.I
[D-01]
Contact type of preferential kWh rate PS installation?
R/W
9.I
[D-02]
Which type of DHW pump is installed?
R/W
9.I
[D-03]
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C.
R/W
9.I
[D-04]
Is a demand PCB connected?
R/W
R/W
9.I
[D-05]
Is the pump allowed to run if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
9.I
[D-07]
Is a solar kit connected?
R/W
9.I
[D-08]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
9.I
[D-09]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
0: No
1: Yes
0~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18
20
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
33°C
13
10
16
[2-0C]=2:
37~65, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0C]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
22
5
1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
[2-0D]=2:
37~65, step: 1°C
55°C
[2-0D]≠2:
37~55, step: 1°C
55°C
5
22
1~6°C, step: 0,5°C
1 °C
0~8, step:1
0 : No limitation
1~4 : 50~80%
5~8 : 50~80% during sampling
6
6
0: Solar priority
1: Heat pump priority
0
0: No
1: Bivalent
-25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~10°C, step 1°C
3°C
0: 1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
0: 1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: No
1: Active open
2: Active closed
3: Safety thermostat
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. Shunt
0: No
1: increase 2°C, span 4°C
2: increase 4°C, span 4°C
3: increase 2°C, span 8°C
4: increase 4°C, span 8°C
0: No
1: Pwr consmp ctrl
0: Forced off
1: As normal
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
9/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
9.I
9.I
9.I
[D-0A]
[D-0B]
[E-00]
--Which type of unit is installed?
R/O
9.I
9.I
9.I
[E-01]
[E-02]
[E-03]
Which type of compressor is installed?
What is the indoor unit software type?
What is the number of backup heater steps?
R/O
R/O
R/W
9.I
[E-04]
Is the power saving function available on the outdoor unit?
R/O
9.I
[E-05]
Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
R/O
9.I
[E-06]
Is a DHW tank installed in the system?
R/O
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
9.I
[E-07]
[E-08]
[E-09]
[E-0A]
[E-0B]
[E-0C]
[E-0D]
[E-0E]
[F-00]
What kind of DHW tank is installed?
Power saving function for outdoor unit.
--Is a bi-zone kit installed?
-Is glycol present in the system?
-Pump operation allowed outside range.
R/O
R/O
9.I
9.I
[F-01]
[F-02]
-Bottom plate heater ON temperature.
R/W
9.I
[F-03]
Bottom plate heater hysteresis.
R/W
R/W
9.I
[F-04]
Is a bottom plate heater connected?
R/W
9.I
9.I
[F-05]
[F-09]
-Pump operation during flow abnormality.
R/W
9.I
9.I
[F-0A]
[F-0B]
-Close shut-off valve during thermo OFF?
R/W
9.I
9.I
[F-0C]
[F-0D]
What is the pump operation mode?
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0
2
0~5
0: LT split
0
1: Heating only
0: No heater
1: External heater
2: 3V
3: 6V
4: 9W
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
2: Integrated tank with BSH
1: Enabled
1
0
0
0
0
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
20
3~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
2~5°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: No
1: Yes
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
0: No
1: Yes
1
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
Final English(#) Setting
- Tanslations
inunit.progress
is not applicable for this
4P499575-1A - 2017.11
Final English - Tanslations in progress
Final English - Tanslations in progress
Copyright 2017 Daikin
4P499573-1 2017.12
Final English - Tanslations in progress